Skip to main content

Full text of "Fantasy & Science Fiction v013n01 (1957 07) (AK)"

See other formats


Sctertce JtcHoM 


THE MAqA!Z.)NE Of 


THE WIND 

BLOWS FREE 

a no>velet 

by CHAD OLIVER 


35 - <t 

SR c* short story 

by Charles Van Daren 

C. M. Kornbluth 
Richard Matheson 
'Avram Davidson 







So Big ...we had to 

coin a new word for it 

* 


YOU'll BE 

‘gocfied 

OUT OF 
YOUR SEAT! 

• 

Swcted 

OUT OF 
YOUR SKIN! 

• 

■puiilUd 

BY THE 


SHEER 


TERROR 
OF IT ALL! 


’^NEWMENDOUS 
- So New - 
So TREMENDOUS! 


PETER PEGGIE 


GRAVES • CASTLE 

MORRIS 

ANKRUM 

w'lh 

THOMAS B. HENRY 
THAN WYENN 
JAMES SEAY 


desperaiel/ 
fighting 
to keep 
alive. . . 
to 

love! 


Produced ond Oirecfed by 

BERT 1. GORDON 

Screen Play by 

Fred Freiberger and Lester 

An AB‘PT Picture 


At Your Favorite Local Theatre Soon! 



An important message 
to engineers 

from Ford Instrument Co. 


New opportunities created by peace and 
defense projects and newly appropriated 
government contracts make room note for 
experienced electronic and mechanical 
engineers in tliese areas: 

Missile Guidance 
Infra-red Detection 
Nuclear Power 
Radar Tracking 
Complex Computers 

Environment is creative 

Entire projects from breadboard to final 
design are the responsibility of one group. 
You watch each step of progress in the 
development of a new idea to practical 
reality. This brings out the best in you, 
and you can be sure you'll use your fullest 
talents. FICo’s environment has to be cre- 
ative, because research and development 
is our business. 


at FICo is a major part of Ford employ- 
ment policy, intend^ to attract and hold 
men of high calibre. 

Here are a few more excellent features 
of FICo employment: 

You associate with engineers with na- 
tional reputation, and of our 3000 em- 
ployees 600 are in engineering activities. 
This is a company small enough for indi- 
vidual attention atrd large enough for 
broad opportunities. 

Plants and cafeteria are air conditioned. 
FICo has a pension plan without cost to 
the employee. There are unusually liberal 
benefits relative to sickness, accident and 
life insurance, hospitalization, etc. And 
employees have full tuition paid for re- 
lated studies in New York’s unexcelled 
graduate education facilities. 

We invite you to mail the below cou- 
pon, submit qualifications in person, or 
send your resume to Philip McCaffrey at 
the below address. All applications are 
treated confidentially. 


Extra benefits 

Employment at FICo is based on a defi- 
nite need projected years into the future, 
which means we offer only positions of 
permanency. Starting salaries are above 
average, and the secure financial system 


I 1 

I FORD INSTRUMENT COMPANY l>$F-S57 { 

I 31-10 Thomson Avo., long (stand City t, N. Y. | 

I Gentlemen: Please send me full information | 

I about engineering opportunities at FICo. i 

I Mo**** - - I 

I Arlt<r— 

. Company | 

[ Po«A*io« • 


'This is a company of engineers" 


says Raymond Jahn, 
President of Ford In- 
trument Company and. 
himself an engineer. 
Our promotion policy 
shows a ready recog- 
nition of ability and 
Initiative. 




FORD 

INSTRUMENT 


CO. 


DIVISION OF SPERRY RAND CORP. 
3MI Tbiasii Avilit, Ling liliiA City, 1, N. T. 



TH E MAqAZINt OF 



The Wind Blows Free (novelet) by chad Oliver 3 

MS. Found in a Chinese Fortune Cookie 



by C. M. KORNBLUTH 

26 

Your Ghost Will Walk 

by ROBERT F. YOUNG 

37 

A Trick or Two 

by JOHN NOVOTNY 

46 

The Unfortunate Topologist (verse) by s. d. gottesman 

52 

Life Cycle 

by POUL ANDERSON 

53 

Sumnifcrland 

by AVRAM DAVIDSON 

69 

The Literate Monster 

by WILLIAM CHAPMAN WHITE 

74 

Eithne 

by IDRIS SEABRIGHT 

75 

You'll Feel Better . . . 

by CAROL EMSHWILLER 

86 

Recommended Reading (a department) 



by ANTHONY BOUCHER 

90 

SR 

by CHARLES VAN DOREN 

95 


When Jack Smith Fought Old Satan (novelet) 

by MARY-CARTER ROBERTS 102 

The Holiday Man by richard matheson 125 

"Coming Next Month" appears on page 73 

COVER PAINTING BY MEL HUNTER 

- - - -- - - _ |_ - - -- - - 

Joseph W. Ferman, publisher Anthony Boucher, editor 

The Magazine of fantasy and Science Fiction, Volume IS, No. /, Whole No. 74, JULY, 1957. Published 
monthly by Fantasy House, Inc., at a copy. Annual subscription, $4.00 in U. S. and Possessions; $5.00 
in alt other countries. Publication office. Concord, N. H. General offices, 527 Madison Avenue, New York, 22, 
N. Y. Editorial office, 2643 Dana St., Ber/ieley 4, Calif. Entered as second class matter at the Post Office at 

Concord, N. H. under tlie Act of March 3, 1879. Printed in U. S. A. © 1957 by Fantasy House, Inc. All 

Tights, including translation into other languages, reserved. Submissions must be accompanied by stamped, 
self addressed envelopes; the Publisher assumes no responsibility for return of unsolicited manuscripts. 

/. Francis McComas, advisory editor; Robert P. Mills, managing editor; Gloria Levitas, assistant 
editor; Constance Di Rienso, executive editorial secretary; Norma Levine, editorial assistant; 
George Salter, art editor 


There are few more stirringly, imaginative themes in science fiction 
than that of the generations-ship — the spaceship whereby man may 
cross the light-years separating us from the stars, even at speeds much 
less than that of light, creating a self-sufficient microcosm in which the 
great-great- . . . -great-grandchildren of the original voyagers may at 
last make planet-fall. So great a theme is never exhausted, even after 
an all-but-definitive treatment by Heinlein. Here Chad Oliver consid- 
ers, not the technological wonders of the concept, but its impact upon 
the character of one man named Sam — the effect upon him of life in 
the Ship and, in turn, his effect upon the Ship’s very existence. 


The Wind "^lows Free 

by CHAD OLIVER 


Have you ever heard, with your 
ears or with your soul, the far wind 
that stirs the world? Have you ever 
felt the deep beat of the sea, the sea 
that is the heart of the Earth ? 

Samuel Kingsley had never 
known these things. 

That may have been his trouble. 

Samuel Kingsley was born with a 
fever in his bones and a fire in his 
blood. As a baby, he was difficult. 
His parents had to w'ork to keep 
their initial joy from changing into 
impatient anger. Sam screamed his 
head off, he fought his food, he 
clawed at his bed. He seldom smiled, 
and he was not affectionate. 

He was bright enough, of course, 
or he would have been destroyed. 


His childhood was little better, a 
stubborn series of scrapes and bruises 
and general mayhem. Sam was big 
for his age, and strong. He walked 
his own path and fought discipline 
like a wild stallion. He had no 
friends. 

Sam was, in short, a maverick. He 
was unbranded. He should never 
have happened where he did, and 
when he did. But he was there, em- 
phatically there, like a burr in the 
hide of a long-complacent animal. 

He got into his first serious trou- 
ble when he was sixteen. 

It was the day of his first big 
dance. He had to get dressed up in 
his best synthetic blue suit, which he 
detested, and the whole thing was 


3 


4 

very formal and proper, despite the 
fact that there were only twelve boys 
and girls of eligible age. The girls 
were poised and full of giggles, and 
the boys were shy, big-footed and 
gawky. 

Sam liked the girls fine, but danc- 
ing bored him stiff. 

And he wasn’t shy. 

When he was discovered to be ab- 
sent from the dance, and it was no- 
ticed that a girl named Susan Merrill 
was also missing, the police were 
called. They found the two young- 
sters in one of the dark forbidden 
corridors. Susan, a blonde of pleas- 
ant proportions for her age, was un- 
hurt but hysterical. Sam was defiant. 

He knew that he had broken not 
one law but two. The black tunnels, 
those mysterious caves that bur- 
rowed into the hidden recesses of 
the Ship, were taboo except to older 
crewmen. And it was unheard-of for 
a boy and a girl to be alone to- 
gether before they were married. 

Sam didn’t care. He had acted on 
impulse and had no regrets. 

Because he was so young, and be- 
cause the Council still did not know 
quite what to make of him, Sam 
got off the hook with a very light 
sentence. He was confined to his 
house for a solid year, and denied 
all privileges. His parents made it as 
rough on him as they could, but he 
was used to that. 

He did his lessons contemptuous- 
ly. When he could sneak out at night, 
he did so. The lights were low at 
night, and he could prowl the black 


FANTASY AND SCIENCE FICTION 

caves all the way to the locked doors 
that sealed the people from the rest 
of the Ship. If he was unable to get 
out of the house, he read books he 
had stolen. Like most boys, he liked 
best the ones he was not supposed 
to read. 

Sam liked sex in his books, be- 
cause he was healthy and had a nor- 
mal curiosity. And something in him 
responded to stories of rebels, to 
tales of men who struck out on 
their own. He dreamed of clipper 
ships, their sails taut against the 
wind. He dreamed of setting out 
into a green wilderness, with only a 
gun for company. 

There were no seas on the Ship. 

There was no wilderness. 

And he had been taught that guns 
were evil. Not as evil, perhaps, as 
that greater evil no one talked about, 
but evil nonetheless. 

At night, lying in his bed, he 
would slam his big fist into the plas- 
tic of his wall in an agony of frus- 
tration and bitterness, slam it until 
the blood smeared his knuckles and 
he could taste it in his mouth. 

He knew tears, and the terrible 
loneliness of a boy who was out of 
step. No one ever heard him sob- 
bing into the coldness and the si- 
lence of the long nights, and no 
one would have understood. 

By his eighteenth year, Sam had 
grown big and raw-boned. Even his 
size was against him. He stood a 
rangy six-foot-four, and weighed bet- 
ter than two hundred pounds. His 


THE WIND BLOWS FREE 


5 


hair was black and untidy, and his 
eyes were dark. He was not a hand- 
some man, but he had a strength in 
him, a power you could feel. 

Sam was marked by his body. At 
eighteen, he was by far the biggest 
man on the Ship. He stood out like 
a pine in a forest of ferns, and he 
accentuated the difference by walk- 
ing proudly erect, with his head 
thrown back. 

He was a solitary animal, and 
therefore suspect. He was lonely, a 
man born out of his time, but he 
made no advances to others. 

Since he was eighteen, and legally 
an adult, he had to take part in the 
annual observance of Heritage Day, 
on the eighth of February. 

Bob Thomas came to get him. 

Bob was the natural leader of his 
age-group. He was a pleasant-look- 
ing boy, with an easy manner and 
an unforced politeness that endeared 
him to his elders. He was the sort 
that accepted life as he found it, 
growing up to embody the ideals 
and traditions of his culture. He 
would have done well in Greece, or 
in Rome, or in England in her days 
of glory. He did well on the Ship. 
In time, he would make the Control 
Room. It was as inevitable for him 
as breathing. 

“Ready for the big deal, Sam.?” 

“Sure.” 

“We’ll pick up the others and get 
on down to the Show, okay.? I think 
we ought to be a little early; shows 
the big boys we’re on the ball.” 

“OK, ^b.” Sam found it impos- 


sible to dislike Bob, although hate 
came easily to him. Bob was inde- 
pendent enough to be a man in his 
right, but he kept his independence 
within approved bounds. He even 
had a sense of humor. And Bob was 
big enough to put up a scrap. Sam 
respected strength as he respected 
few other things. He and Bob had 
fought it out once, and Sam had 
been hard pressed to win. Much to 
his surprise. Bob had not reported 
him, and had even lied about the 
bruises on his face. 

As a matter of fact. Bob was the 
closest thing to a friend he had ever 
had. There had been a few girls, 
but that was different. 

They walked down the street, ac- 
tually a sort of catwalk, past the 
rows of identical cabins that people 
called houses. Their footsteps echoed 
hollowly in the great chamber. 
Above and below them, huge metal 
girders spanned the belly of the 
Ship. The slope of the Ship’s gray 
walls was their heaven and their 
earth, as though they lived inside a 
vast bowl. Branching off from the 
main street, smaller catwalks led to 
dark passages — corridors to the Con- 
trol Room, to the engine room, the 
hydroponics chamber. Some of them 
even went Outside, or so it was 
rumored. Only the specially selected 
members of the Crew could use any 
of these passages; there were others 
that were taboo to all. And there 
were legends, myths, about things 
that lived in some of those black 
caves. ... 


6 

The Show was in the central 
square. It was a perfectly ordinary 
tri-di theater, and today it was even 
more solemn than usual. Men in 
full-dress uniforms stood in a double 
column through which they had to 
march. The priest blessed them be- 
fore they took their seats. Patriotic 
music flowed from the speakers. 

It was all fairly impressive, Sam 
supposed, but he was not moved. 
Of course, this was the first time he 
had been permitted inside the Show 
on Heritage Day, but he expected 
nothing more than a mild anticli- 
max. After all, it was no secret what 
went on in there. He had had it 
drummed into him as far back as 
he could remember. 

Still, it ought to be more inter- 
esting than the usual pallid fare. 

He took his seat in the front row 
with the others of his age-group. 
Bob had the aisle seat, of course, 
and Sam found himself next to Su- 
san Merrill. He grinned at her 
broadly and she flushed and kept 
her eyes on the screen. 

There were blessings and speeches 
galore. Even old Captain Fondren 
made a speech, and the new Navi- 
gator was presented to much ap- 
plause. 

Sam endured it all. 

Then the lights dimmed and the 
screen glowed. 

The character of tlie music 
changed sharply. It was grim, 
threatening, with an insistent beat 
that thumped you in the chest. 

Sam was suddenly conscious that 


FANTASY AND SCIENCE FICTION 

he was very close to the screen. 

In spite of himself, he tensed, wait- 
ing. 

The palms of his hands began to 
sweat. 

It started with a vicious abrupt- 
ness, slamming him back into his 
seat. 

Sound that was more than sound, 
sound that tore at you with a solid 
physical impact. Light that was more 
than light, light that seared your eye- 
balls with a flash that mocked the 
sun. 

Sam screamed with the rest, and 
his voice was less than nothing. He 
closed his eyes, and the brilliance 
hammered through his eyelids. He 
trembled violently. He had no mind, 
no spirit, no personality. He wasn’t 
Sam Kingsley, he wasn’t anybody. 
He was just a spot of horror in a 
maelstrom of violence, trying to 
hang on, trying to ride it out. 

The ripping, screeching roar 
ceased. 

The dead silence flowed in with a 
shock of its own. 

Sam opened his eyes. At first, he 
couldn’t see. There was only a voice, 
speaking into the emptiness. 

The voice said: This is Earth. This 
was your planet. Look, M it now. 

Sam looked, his heart thudding 
like a wild thing in his chest. 

He saw desolation, and death, and 
worse than death. He saw great ci- 
ties gutted, their buildings shattered, 
their streets ripped like tissue paper. 
Black windows stared at him with 


THE WIND BLOWS FREE 


7 


cold stpnc eyes. A few figures that 
might have been human stumbled 
through the ruins, clawing at their 
faces, their shredded clothes, their 
blistered bodies. 

He saw a land that had been 
green, and was green no more. A 
sere, scorched desert where nothing 
lived, where the very idea of life 
was blasphemy. No trees, no water, 
no crops. 

Nothing. 

A red sun glared in a murky sky. 

He saw people. He saw men, 
women, and children: all dead or 
dying. A man, his naked body swol- 
len with blisters, leaping into a swim- 
ming pool, holding himself under, 
gulping at the water like a fish from 
a nightmare sea. A blind woman 
sitting in what had once been an 
automobile, trying to feed a baby 
that could no longer move. 

Sam could not watch it all. He 
was sick and dizzy. He could not 
think. 

The voice was still speaking: 
This is what a war did to your 
world. This is what hydrogen bombs 
and cobalt bombs and germ bombs 
did to your world. T his is what peo- 
ple like you did to their own world 
when they couldn’t grow up in time. 

There was more. 

There was enough so that it 
rammed its message into your in- 
sides. No man could sit through this 
and ever forget it. Sam felt himself 
scaled down to size, and he dis- 
covered that there were bigger 
things than Sam Kingsley in the uni- 


verse. This is not a finding that any 
young man makes with pleasure, 
and it was doubly difficult for Sam. 

But you cannot argue with obliter- 
ation. 

The voice said: These are the oth- 
er planets that make up your solar 
system. These are the worlds we 
explored before the end came. These 
are the worlds we could reach. 

Sam knew of these worlds, knew 
them from the history books. But 
he saw them now as though for the 
first time, saw them through a mist 
of despair. 

The wind-whipped seas of sand 
that were Mars. 

The violet desolation that was Ve- 
nus. 

The frozen forbidding hell that 
was Saturn. 

All of them. 

Hopeless. 

There was nowhere in our solar 
system that could shelter us. Our 
own world was dying. We did what 
we could. 

We built the Ships, 

The Ships filled the screen, im- 
mense towers of metal, standing like 
colossal silver tombstones in the 
graveyard of the world. Of course, 
most of them had been built long 
before the last poisoning of the 
Earth. They had been designed for 
man’s greatest adventure, the explor- 
ation of the stars. They were not 
fundamentally different from the 
spaceships that had touched down 
on the planets of the solar system. 
Unhappily, no fastcr-than-light drive 


8 


FANTASY AND SCIENCE FICTION 


had been invented, in the nick of 
time or otherwise, and although 
men were working on the secrets of 
prolonged suspended animation, this 
had not as yet proved practical. 

In any event, the problem was 
academic. 

The Ships had to go. 

They were planned to be entirely 
self-sufficient. Green plants in great 
hydroponic tanks provided the air, 
synthetic foods nourished in chemi- 
cal vats supplied the means of sup- 
port, and an entire Ship formed a 
balanced ecological system that 
would maintain life for generations 
— provided the population remained 
stable. 

To Sam, it was a strange thing 
indeed to see a Ship from the out- 
side. The Ship had always been a 
curved horizon of gray metal walls, 
a tangle of catwalks, a cluster of 
houses and tanks and sealed corri- 
dors that were dark caves of mys- 
tery. From the outside, it was a 
thing of beauty, but not the home 
he had always known. 

Where sunlight and air and roll- 
ing land surrounded the Ship on the 
screen, there was now only the star- 
dusted infinity of space, an empti- 
ness more hostile to life than the 
polluted world the Ship had left be- 
hind. Sam had never seen that dark 
sea he sailed, but he had grown up 
with the ever-present knowledge of 
its existence. For the people of the 
Ship, the Outside was death itself. 
At night, when the lights were low, 
you would lie in your bed and feel 


that strangest of seas lapping at the 
walls of your room, those icy waves 
seeping into your head and your 
nerves and your blood. . . . 

The^ voice said; You are all the 
passengers on a Ship. You who hear 
my voice may be the only human 
beings left; each Ship follows a dif- 
ferent course. It may ta\e centuries 
before you reach a world you can 
live on, circling a sun I cannot even 
imagine. You may never find it. But 
remember your Heritage! Remem- 
ber that you are men, and remember 
what happened to men on Earth! 
You must begin again, you children 
of Earth. And you must be careful, 
you must be wise. If ever you find 
hate in your hearts, remember, re- 
member . . . 

And it happened again. 

The light that was beyond light, 
the blasting roar that was a crazed 
river of sound. The twisted cities, 
the poisoned air, the shrieks of the 
ruined and the maimed . . . 

The screen darkened. 

The lights in the Show came on 
again. 

There was a terrible silence, for 
what was there to say? Sam kept his 
eyes straight ahead, afraid somehow 
to look around him. 

Captain Fondren walked up to 
the stage, his body bent with years, 
his hair gray and lifeless. 

“This is your Heritage,” he said 
slowly, speaking the ancient ritual. 
“We all have a sacred trust to pre- 
serve what we can. All who hear my 
voice are adults, members of the 


THE WIND BLOWS FREE 


9 


people. You will conduct yourselves 
accordingly throughout your lives. 
We dare not fail. It is my duty to in- 
form you that this Ship has now 
been in space for three hundred and 
ninety-seven years. I ask you to join 
me in prayer.” 

He paused, his old eyes looking 
far beyond the Ship. 

"The Lord is my shepherd . . .” 

The ancient words filled the cham- 
ber. It was one of those rare mo- 
ments when mumbled phrases and 
familiar rituals suddenly become 
charged with meaning. The words 
were strong words, but Sam could 
hardly hear them. 

Three hundred and ninety-seven 
years, he thought. T hree , hundred 
and ninety-seven years. 

If they had not found what they 
sought in all that time, they would 
never find it. 

The voyage would never end. 

The Ship was all there was. 

Sam was impressed by Heritage 
Day, impressed and scared. For the 
first time in his life, he began to 
understand the Ship and the people 
who lived in it. 

His people were a frightened peo- 
ple, a refugee people. They were con- 
servative and cautious because they 
were trying to survive. They were 
existing in a kind of cultural sus- 
pended animation, just hanging on 
between disaster and a new begin- 
ning. 

The words of his parents meant a 
little more now. 


"Sam, Sam, why can’t you be like 
the other little boys? Why do you 
always want to be getting into trou- 
ble? Now, do your homework and 
we’ll have a nice synthesteak for you 
when you’re through!’ That was 
Mom, a colorless, shapeless woman, 
going through the motions of life 
without ever really living. 

And Dad, a big man like Sam, 
somehow tragic, somehow defeated 
before he had ever gone into battle. 
“You can’t change the world, son. 
The rules are there for a reason. 
You’ve got to do your part, son, 
whether you like it or not.” 

Sam tried. 

He told himself that he had been 
a fool. He was to live in the Ship, 
and he had only one life to live. Who 
was he to think he was better than 
other people? 

He was assigned work in the main 
hydroponics chamber, and he 
learned his job dutifully. He forced 
himself to be interested in the grow- 
ing plants and in the chemical sea 
in which they grew. He regulated 
the sun lamps and adjusted the 
chemical flows with precision. He 
grew to like the fresh air of the 
chamber and looked forward to go- 
ing to work every morning. At least, 
the hydroponics chamber was green, 
it was alive. The dead air piped in 
from the rest of' the Ship depressed 
him, and going home at night was 
not pleasant. 

And yet, Sam was not happy. He 
tried to be like the others, but he 
found no magic switch that would 


10 

shut off his mind. If only the air 
would move more, if only it would 
flow in something different from its 
orderly, measured channels! If only 
the wind would blow, if only he 
could have clouds and storms and 
rivers of rain! 

Sam still dreamed at night, and 
that was fatal. 

He did not marry, and that added 
to his discontent. There were times 
when his body seethed as though 
with fever, times when the thoughts 
of women were like a sickness in 
his stomach. He tried to fall into 
what the people called love, but he 
could not. He would try one girl 
and then another, and each time 
something within him would rebel. 

“Sam, try to be nice lif^e the oth- 
ers. . . 

“Sam, you mustn’t say such things, 
they’re wicked. . . 

“Sam, you’re so silly. . . ” 

For five years, Sam worked in the 
hydroponics chamber at the same 
job. He did it well. He did it better 
than it had ever been done before. 

But he was not promoted. 

No one ever sounded him out about 
joining the Crew, not even Bob. 

The other men of his own age 
moved on up the scale. Every one of 
them was a member of the Crew. 
Sam stayed in the hydroponics cham- 
ber, and after five years he knew he 
was stuck there for life. The Coun- 
cil didn’t trust him, would never 
trust him. His crime was that he 
was different, and on the Ship that 
was the worst crime of all. 


FANTASY AND SCIENCE FICTION 

One evening, when he was work- 
ing late with the plants, he looked 
up to see Ralph Holbrook watching 
him. Ralph was the same age as 
Sam; they had gone through the 
ceremony of Heritage Day togeth- 
er. Ralph had been a timid boy, but 
he was cocky now in his new uni- 
form. 

He was also a little drunk. 

“Still at it, eh Sam.?” 

“Looks that way.” 

“Like your work?” 

“Can’t complain.” 

“You’d better like it, Sam boy.” 

Sam turned and faced him. 
“Meaning?” 

“You know what I mean! You 
used to think you were really some- 
thing, didn’t you? Picking on every- 
body, swaggering around like you 
owned the Ship. Where are you now, 
Sam boy? Where are you now?” 

Sam felt the old anger surging up 
within him. He clenched his big fists, 
bowed his neck. His eyes narrowed. 
“Take it easy, Ralph. I don’t want to 
hurt you.” 

Ralph laughed. “Still think you’re 
tough, Sam boy? Still think you can 
be a big man with your fists? Come 
on, Sami Try something!” 

Sam took a step forward, his heart 
pounding. He could beat Ralph to a 
pulp, and he knew it. 

But he stopped. 

Striking a member of the Crew? 

He didn’t dare. 

“Run along, Ralph,” he said qui- 
etly. “Mommy’s probably waiting up 
for you,” 


THE WINO BLOWS FREE 


11 


Ralph Holbrook stepped in and 
slapped his face with the palm of 
his hand. 

Sam didn’t move. 

Ralph laughed again, turned, and 
walked proudly out of the chamber. 

Sam’s face was expressionless. 

He turned back to his work, did 
what he had to do, and left the hy- 
droponics room. The dead air 
clogged his nostrils as he walked. 

There was no outward sign that 
anything had changed. He was just 
the same Sam Kingsley, big and 
awkward and alone, walking home 
from work, his footsteps trailing 
him with empty echoes. 

But Sam had been pushed over 
the threshold. 

He had not made the decision; it 
had been made for him. 

The gray hopeless monotony of 
his life had been nibbling away at 
him for a long time. The future 
stretched away before him like a 
featureless plain, without life, with- 
out color, without purpose. 

He was caught in an alien world, 
trapped in a Ship in the deeps of 
space. There was nothing in that 
orderly world for him, nothing but 
an existence that was less than life. 

Very well. 

He had tried to live by their rules, 
and had failed. 

From now on, he would make his 
own rules. 

His step quickened, he was more 
alert than he had been in years. All 
his life he had been fascinated by 
those dark tunnels that burrowed 


away into the depths of the Ship. 
Those forbidden caves were the only 
frontiers he had. High officers of the 
Crew were the only people who 
were ever permitted in most of them, 
and it was clear by now that Sam 
would never be a member of the 
Crew. 

He had no real plan. He simply 
knew that he had to do something, 
and there was only one place to 
start. 

He ate a hearty meal and took a 
nap. 

For once, his sleep was untrou- 
bled. 

He woke up four hours later, 
stuffed his pockets with food, and 
tested his tubelight. He slipped out 
of the house into the gloom of the 
sleeping Ship. 

His feet were sure beneath him, 
and there was nothing clumsy about 
him now. Like a shadow, he moved 
across a little-used catwalk that 
spanned the black belly of the Ship. 

A dark tunnel loomed before him. 

A faintly glowing sign said: au- 
thorized PERSONNEL ONLY. 

Sam smiled and stepped into the 
cave of night. 

He took off his shoes, careful to 
make no sounds that might be over- 
heard. It was pitch dark in the cor- 
ridor, but he was afraid to use his 
tubelight yet. Looking back over his 
shoulder, he could see the tunnel 
entrance framed by the Ship’s night 
lights. 

He moved along as fast as he 


12 

dared, the fingers of his left hand 
lightly touching the wall to guide 
him. The passage seemed straight as 
a needle, and progress was not dif- 
ficult. Nevertheless, he felt a ner- 
vousness he couldn’t shake off. From 
his earliest childhood, he had been 
told never to go into one of those 
corridors, told of horrible things that 
lurked there, waiting. 

He fancied that he was old 
enough now to discount such nur- 
sery tales, but just the same — 

Something cold hit him in the 
face. 

Sam ducked, fell flat on the floor. 
He stifled a scream, then managed a 
feeble grin as he realized what had 
happened. He had run into a door. 
He risked the light, and in its pen- 
cil beam he saw that the door was 
an ordinary metal one, sealing off 
the passage. There was another sign 
on it: KEEP OUT. 

Sam tried the door. 

It was unlocked. 

He swung it open, stepped 
through, and closed it again behind 
him. He blinked his eyes. This tun- 
nel was larger, and the lights were 
still on. It had a well-used air about 
it. He hesitated, figuring out his 
position. If he turned left, he would 
wind up back at the town where the 
people lived. If he turned right, he 
would be moving toward the bow of 
the Ship, toward the Control Room. 

Sam went right. 

He almost ran along, his shoes 
dangling around his neck. He felt 
the cold sweat on his body, the anx- 


FANTASY AND SCIENCE FICTION 

ious thudding of his heart. It was all 
so simple, so like a dream, hurrying 
down this silent passage, the Ship 
around him like a monstrous beast, 
waiting, waiting . , . 

What would they do to him if 
they caught him here.^ He tried 
not to think about it. He just kept 
going as fast as he could, his shoes 
bruising his chest, the tubelight 
gripped in his hand as though it 
were a weapon — 

He rounded a turn, and stopped 
as though he had slammed into a 
wall. He held his breath, his lungs 
straining, the sweat dripping down 
his sides in icy streams. 

There were two Crewmen in the 
corridor. 

It was a moment frozen in time; 
it seemed to go on forever. The two 
men were seated at a small table, 
playing cards. One man was facing 
Sam, but his eyes were on the cards 
in his hand. Just beyond the table, 
there was a blaze of light from the 
open door of the Control Room. 

Sam stood stock still. He was 
afraid to move, and afraid not to 
move. Almost involuntarily, he re- 
treated back around the turn. He 
leaned against the wall, gasping with 
the effort to breathe silently. 

Guards! Here, in the middle of 
the night. Why.? 

Had they seen him, caught just a 
flicker of movement.? They would 
surely have spotted him if they had 
been alert, but why should they be 
alert.? The Ship was run with the 
precision of a clock; people were 


THE WIND BLOWS FREE 


13 


never where they shouldn’t be, 
Still— 

He tried to hold his breath, tried 
to listen. 

Voices. 

They had seen him! 

“You’re just jumpy. I didn’t hear 
anythingl’ 

“1 tell you, there was something 
there 1’ 

“You just don’t lil{e your hand!’ 
Laughter. “Did it have two heads, 
or three?’’ 

“OK, OK. Maybe I’m crazy. But 
I’m going to have a loo\!’ 

A chair scraped across a metallic 
floor. 

Run! 

Sam sprinted down the tunnel, 
heedless of the noise, as fast as he 
could go. The passage was hideous- 
ly straight, there was no place to 
hide. He damned himself for a fool, 
but it was too late now. If he could 
just find a pool of shadow, a curve 
in the corridor, anything — 

“Hey!’’ 

They had seen him. 

Sam redoubled his efforts. He de- 
termined not to panic. He mustn’t 
let himself go, he had to think . . . 

The guards couldn’t have recog- 
nized him, not at that distance. He 
could outrun them, he was certain 
of that. If he could get back to that 
branching passage, he could slip into 
the sleeping town and nobody would 
ever be the wiser. 

He tossed a glance back over his 
shoulder, and his heart sank at what 
he saw. The guards had stopped. 


and were using a wall phone to call 
ahead. 

Sam slowed his pace, fighting for 
breath. There was just one question 
he had to answer: could he reach 
that cutoff tunnel before the Crew- 
men from town got there from the 
other end.? He wanted to think that 
he could, but he had to .admit that 
the odds were against it. He still 
had too far to go. And even if he 
did, the others were not fools. They 
would know about that cutoff, 
would be waiting at the other end. 

No, that was out. 

There was only one thing to do, 
and he did it. 

The next door he came to, he 
stopped. He fumbled open the catch, 
swung the door open, and slipped 
inside. At first, he was blind; there 
was no Ught at all. He switched on 
his tubelight, closed the door, and 
bolted it shut. 

He made himself take the time to 
put on his shoes. His lungs ached 
in his chest, and the air in the pas- 
sage was stale and dead. He held 
the light in front of him, and tried 
to run. He soon slowed to a fast 
walk. 

He listened carefully, but heard no 
sounds of pursuit. 

The corridor was different from 
the others. It seemed older somehow, 
and he had the eerie feeling that no 
man had walked these floors for cen- 
turies. There were oil slicks on the 
walls, and the floor was gritty. 

Sam kept going. 

He came to another door that 


14 

sealed off the passage. There was a 
sign on it, but it was streaked and 
dirty; he couldn’t read it. He fum- 
bled the catch open, shoved on the 
door. 

It didn’t open. 

Sam bit his lip. He backed off, 
took a deep breath, and threw his 
shoulder into the door. It gave a 
little. He hit it again, and yet again. 
It swung open with a rasping 
screech. He squeezed through and 
shut it again behind him. The bolt 
stuck and he couldn’t throw it. 

He flashed the light around. The 
corridor was smaller now; his head 
almost scraped the ceiling. The air 
was so flat he could hardly breathe 
it. There was a layer of fine, white 
dust on the floor. When he took a 
step, the stuff puffed up in a cloud, 
stinging his eyes and his nostrils. 

Sam hesitated, doubting himself. 
He could still go back. It would be 
rough, but they probably wouldn’t 
kill him. A little conditioning in the 
surgery, that Was all, and he would 
be the most placid man on the Ship. 
He shuddered. 

There was a chance, just a chance, 
that this tunnel might eventually 
take him back to the town, back to 
some forgotten entrance. He still had 
perhaps five hours before morning, 
and he would not be missed until 
then. 

He smiled sourly. He had only 
intended to do a little exploring this 
first night; he had fully expected to 
be back at work tomorrow. Now he 
was trapped, cut off, and he would 


FANTASY AND SCIENCE FICTION 

probably never be able to go back to 
the life he had known. 

Well, it was a small loss. 

Sam took a bar of food out of his 
pocket and wolfed it down. He felt 
a little better, but he was desper- 
ately thirsty. If there were ever a 
next time, he would bring water and 
forget about the food. 

Of course, there wasn’t going to 
be any next time. 

Not for him. 

He steadied himself and flashed 
the light around again. There was 
nothing to see. The black cave 
stretched away as far as the light 
could penetrate. The fine dust on 
the floor was white, like the snow 
he had seen in pictures. 

There was just one way to go. 

Sam moved forward at a fast walk, 
the dust puffing up around him until 
he could hardly see. He moved on, 
his mind frozen hard against the 
terror that seeped in around him, 
walking down a silent tunnel to no- 
where. 

He kept it up for two hours, and 
then he couldn’t take it any longer. 
The clouds of dust hung in the stale 
air like smoke, and his throat was 
raw and burning. 

He had seen nothing. 

He had heard nothing, save for 
the pad-pad-pad of his own feet. 

The tunnel had twisted and 
curved until he didn’t have the faint- 
est idea where he was. There had 
been other corridors branching off 
from the one he was in, but he had 


THE WIND BLOWS FREE 


15 


been afraid to try them. This way, 
he could at least retrace his steps if 
he had to. He had a childish, irra- 
tional fear of getting lost, even 
though he now had no home to go 
back to. 

But he had to get out of the dust. 

He came to a door in the wall and 
forced it open. He went through 
and closed it quickly behind him. He 
stood very still, trying not to stir up 
the dust. 

He flashed the light around him. 

For one awful moment, he 
thought all the stories he had heard 
about things that lived in the for- . 
bidden caves were true. He was in a 
room, not a tunnel, and the walls 
were lined with grotesque figures — 
big bulging caricatures of men, with 
glassy faces and swollen arms and 
legs. 

But the things were not alive. 

They had never been alive. 

Gingerly, Sam stepped over and 
touched one. It was made of some 
kind of smooth stuff that reminded 
him of pottery, and it glistened dully 
in the light. 

How long had it been since this 
lost chamber had seen a light? A 
hundred years? Two hundred? 
Three ? 

He tapped the thing with his fin- 
gernail. It gave off only a faint click, 
although he knew that it was hollow. 
He looked around him, estimating 
rapidly. There must have been at 
least fifty of the weird figures in the 
chamber with him. 

He knew what they were, and it 


came as something of a shock when 
he realized that he had never actu- 
ally seen one of them before. * 

Spacesuits. 

He was in a storeroom full of 
spacesuits. 

Strange, half-formed thoughts be- 
gan to well up in his mind. He 
hardly knew what to make of them, 
and for a moment he feared he might 
be going mad. Funny I’ve never seen 
a spacesuit before. Funny none of 
us were given training in their use. 
Funny no one has ever had to go 
Outside for repairs. 

Or were they a carefully guarded 
secret, one of the privileges of the 
Crew? 

But what was all this secrecy for, 
anyhow? 

The puzzle of the midnight guards 
at the Control Room door came 
back to plague him. Sure, it would- 
n’t do to have women and kids and 
questionable characters like himself 
swarming over the place, getting in 
the way. But guards in the middle of 
the night seemed a bit excessive. 

What were they hiding in the 
Control Room ? 

What was there they did not dare 
let anyone see until they knew they 
could trust him absolutely ? 

In fact, now that he thought about 
it, there was one question that might 
be asked about a lot of things on the 
Ship. 

It was a deadly question, a ques- 
tion that had toppled empires. 

Why? 

The unvoiced word vibrated 


16 

against his brain, and there was no 
answer to it. 

He looked more closely at the 
spacesuit in front of him. The thing 
had a thin film of dust on it. He 
heaved on it, turned it around. There 
were two oxygen tanks clamped to 
its back. He found the switch that 
activated the air supply and threw 
it. 

Nothing happened. 

He picked up the heavy helmet, 
pressed it to his ear. He heard noth- 
ing. He sniffed at it, and the air was 
as dead as ever. There was no oxy- 
gen coming through. 

Surely, in a ship in space, it would 
only be common sense to keep the 
spacesuits ready for action. He shook 
his head. Of course, there must be 
others somewhere, but still — 

He replaced the helmet and 
chewed on another food bar. He 
hated to go back into the dust-laden 
corridor, but he couldn’t stay here. 
He only had a few hours left before 
the working day began. 

A plan ? 

He had no plan. He thought 
vaguely that there might be a life- 
boat of some sort on the Ship, but 
it would be a pure accident if he 
found it. Even if he did locate it, it 
would do him no good. He had had 
no training in operating a ship in 
space, and he knew enough about 
spaceships to be certain that he 
couldn’t just pile into one and go 
blasting merrily on his way. 

In any event, where could he go? 

One notion did occur to him, Un- 


F.\NTASY AND SCIENCE FICTION 

less there were no rhyme or reason 
at all to the plan to the Ship, there 
must have been a purpose in locat- 
ing the storeroom where it was. 

And there was just one such pur- 
pose that he could think of. 

He opened the door again, cough- 
ing as the dust' hit him. He listened 
carefully,, but the corridor was ut- 
terly silent. It stretched on before 
him, a dead and lifeless thing, heavy 
with the weight of centuries. 

Sam moved on, trying not to give 
way to despair. 

Pad-pad-pad. 

The fine white dust swirled and 
eddied in the old, stale air. 

^ The pencil of light stabbed 
through the gloom, becoming a solid 
bar of silver radiance as it knifed 
through the glittering clouds of dust. 

His throat Was so dry he could no 
longer swallow, and he thought of 
the clean, fresh, air of the hydropon- 
ics room with hopeless longing. 

Pad-pad-pad, 

His shoes kicked something on the 
floor, and he looked down. There 
was a heap of something there, white 
as the dust that covered it. 

Bones. 

Bones, and a shrunken skin as 
dry as old paper. A human skull 
gaped at him with something that 
had once been eyes. He knelt and 
touched the thing. The skin crum- 
bled at the slightest pressure. 

Sam looked at the pitiful rem- 
nants that had long ago walked and 
breathed and loved. He felt no hor- 
ror, only an odd surge of sym- 


THE WIND BLOWS FREE 


17 


pathy and relief. He was not the 
first, after all! He was not the only 
man who had gotten out of line. 

How many others had there been? 

He waved a friendly greeting at 
the pile of bones. 

/ wish I could have \nown you, 
he thought. We might have done 
something, together. I might have 
had someone to tal\ to. We could 
have been friends, you and I. 

He stepped over the bones, being 
careful not to disturb them, and 
walked on. 

Within half an hour, he came to 
the end of the tunnel. 

A door sealed the passage before 
him, but this was no ordinary door. 
This was a massive metal thing set 
into the very side of the Ship itself. 

A faded sign read; danger, lock 

FOUR. DANGER. 

Sam stared at the gleaming metal. 
Involuntarily, he backed away. He 
had come to the end of his world. 
Beyond that door, he knew, was the 
chamber of an airlock. And on the 
other side of the airlock— 

Outside. 

Deep space. 

The End. 

Sam sat down in the dust, his 
head in his hands. He didn’t try to 
kid himself. He was through. This 
was all there w'as. He had no choice 
now. He could only retrace his steps 
along that dead tunnel, go back and 
give himself up. 

And then.? 

He shivered, and the blood ran 
cold in his veins. 


No, no. I won't give up. 1 can’t. 
Not yet. 

He got to his feet, trembling. 

He forced himself to walk up to 
the airlock door. He reached out 
and touched it. It felt icy, or was 
that just his imagination ? 

He wasn’t thinking; he was be- 
yond that. He only knew that the 
Ship and everything in it had be- 
come horrible to him, unbearable. 
Maybe there was a workable space- 
suit inside the lock, maybe he could 
go Outside and drift forever among 
the stars. . . . 

It would be a cleaner death than 
the thing that waited for him at the 
other end of the tunnel. 

He reached out and gripped the 
wheel in the middle of the lock. 

He wrenched it, hard. 

It stuck at first, then began to turn. 

Instantly, the corridor exploded 
into sound. 

A siren screamed, rising and fall- 
ing, screeching through the Ship. 

The noise deafened him after the 
hours of silence. He covered his 
ears and the siren wailed in his 
brain. 

Oh God, they’ve got it wired. 
They know where 1 am. They’ll 
come after me, kill nte — 

Sam didn’t want to die. Opening 
the inner door of the airlock had 
been a gesture, nothing more. Faced 
with the reality of death, he had only 
one instinctive thought: 

Hide! 

Get away! 

He ran back into the tunnel. 


18 

He ran blindly, bruising himself 
against the walls, a mindless body 
fleeing through a nightmare cave of 
arid white clouds and the insistent 
fury of the siren’s scream. 

With numbing abruptness, Sam 
Kingsley heard a human voice. 

Human ? 

It was screeching so that he could 
hardly tell, screeching a single mad 
high-pitched note over and over 
again. How could he hear it over the 
wail of the siren ? He shook his head 
wildly, like an animal. 

The siren had stopped. 

He stuffed his big fist into his 
own mouth, biting down on the 
knuckles. The screaming voice that 
might have been human turned into 
a strangled gurgle. 

It was his own voice. 

He sobbed, and the sound was 
shatteringly loud in the sudden si- 
lence. His ears were ringing, his body 
was wet with sweat. The dust in his 
lungs made him cough, but he didn’t 
have enough air to cough. . . . 

He stumbled over the skeleton in 
the corridor, scattering the bones. He 
tried to keep running, but he was 
staggering now. 

Hide! 

Get away! 

If he could just reach that store- 
room, get in there with the space- 
suits, there might be a chance, a 
prayer — 

No. 

It was too late. 

He heard voices ahead of him in 


FANTASY AND SCIENCE FICTION 

the corridor, brushing noises, the 
tread of feet. 

“Kingsley!” The shout was 
strangely muffled. “Kingsley! We 
know you’re in there! Stay where 
you are. Don’t try to fight. We won’t 
hurt you. Kingsley! Can you hear 
me?” 

Sam collapsed on the floor, his face 
in the dust, gasping for breath. He 
didn’t answer, he couldn’t answer. 
He stayed there in a huddle, unable 
to think, beyond even despair, the 
blood roaring in his ears. 

The lights in the ancient tunnel 
came on, blinding him, searing 
whitely into his brain. 

The footsteps came closer, closer. 

There. He saw a shoe, right in 
front of his eyes. 

Voices. "Is he dead?’’ "No such 
luchj’ "He’s too tough to hill.’’ 

A foot nudged his battered shoul- 
der, none too gently. 

"Come on, Sam boy. Get up.” 

It was like awakening after a too- 
long sleep. He had to swim back to- 
ward awareness, pulling his way 
through dense layers of stifling fog. 
Every bone in his body hurt. He 
rolled over very slowly. 

He struggled to his knees. 

The foot hit him again. It wasn’t 
a hard kick, but it didn’t have to be. 
Sam went down, his mouth in the 
dust. 

"Come on, Sam boy. Stop playing 
around.” 

"That’s enough of that, Ralph. Let 
him alone.” 


THE WIND BLOWS FREE 


19 


Sam tried it again. He got to his 
knees, waited. Nothing happened. 
He pulled himself erect. His vision 
cleared. 

There were three of them in the 
corridor with him. They were all 
Crewmen, and they all had face 
masks on to protect them from the 
dust. He recognized Ralph Hol- 
brook by his voice. The men all had 
canteens clipped to their belts. 

“Water,” he said. His voice was a 
dry croak. 

The men were ghostly in the white 
light. One of them shook his head. 
“No water, Kingsley. Not until we 
get you back where you belong. Af- 
ter that, you can have all the water 
you want.” 

“Water,” he said again. His throat 
was on fire. 

“Sorry, Sam boy.” 

Holbrook moved a little. Sam 
could hear the water gurgling in his 
canteen. 

“Let’s go, Kingsley,” said the man 
who had spoken before. He sound- 
ed almost bored. “It’s a long walk 
back.” 

Sam stared at the canteen on Hol- 
brook’s belt with raw, red eyes. He 
stood absolutely motionless, and then 
something snapped inside him. It 
was hke a dam bursting, a dam he 
had held in check all his life. His 
eyes brightened, and a terrible icy 
strength flowed into his exhausted 
body. 

He stood up straight, his head al- 
most touching the roof of the tun- 
nel. His huge frame seemed to swell 


until he filled the corridor. His hair 
was white with dust, but his eyes 
were black coals in the light. He 
clenched his ' bleeding fists and his 
lips drew back from his teeth. 

Suddenly, he was very calm, very 
sure. 

He stood there like a rock. 

He was through running. 

And then, for the first time in his 
life, Sam Kingsley really got mad. 

He took one quick step forward 
and caught Holbrook’s tunic in his 
fist. Holbrook’s eyes widened and a 
curious noise came out of his mouth. 
Sam yanked, and the fabric ripped. 

Off balance, Holbrook started to 
fall on his face. 

Sam brought his beefy right fist 
up from his knees and sent it crunch- 
ing into Holbrook’s jaw. Something 
broke; the jaw went flabby. Quite 
coldly, Sam drove a piston left into 
Holbrook’s stomach, and then 
caught him with another right to the 
side of the head as the man crum- 
pled at his feet. 

Silently, he went after the others. 

The corridor was so narrow that 
the two Crewmen got in each oth- 
er’s way. With icy deliberation, Sam 
held them off with a jabbing left 
hand, throwing his right with merci- 
less precision. 

The first man kicked at him fran- 
tically. Sam caught the foot, twisted 
it with a wrenching jolt. The man 
screamed. Sam picked him up by the 
feet and smacked his head against 
the tunnel wall. 


20 

The last Crewman turned to run. 

Sam reached out his long left arm, 
caught his shoulder, spun him 
around. The man slashed out with 
something that glittered and Sam 
felt a hot wetness in his chest. He 
narrowed his black eyes, slammed 
his right into the man’s face with all 
his strength. He followed it up re- 
lentlessly, slugging the man back 
down the corridor. The man fell, 
staggered to his feet again. 

Sam let him have it. 

It was all over. 

Sam felt a small warm glow of 
satisfaction deep within himself, and 
that was all. He stood quietly for a 
moment, gasping for breath in the 
dust-choked air, and then he reached 
down and unhooked the man’s can- 
teen. He lifted it to his lips and 
poured cold water down his throat. 

That was a mistake. 

When he was through being sick, 
he got Holbrook’s canteen and 
forced himself to sip the water slow- 
ly, letting it trickle down until nau- 
sea made him stop. Then he found 
one of the face masks that was still 
relatively intact and pulled it over 
his face. 

Air! 

Clean, filtered air! 

He breathed deeply, luxuriating 
in the stuff. He filled his lungs with 
it, tasting it, loving it. His chest 
worked like a bellows until the oxy- 
gen made him dizzy and he had to 
slow down. 

He examined his chest. It was slip- 
pery with blood, blood furred now 


FANTASY AND SCIENCE FICTION 

with sticky dust, but it was not a 
deep cut. In any event, he wasn’t 
worried about it. There was no time 
left for worry. 

Sam knew that he had killed the 
man he had slammed against the 
corridor wall. He knew it without 
looking, and he felt no remorse. It 
was simply another item to be added 
to the list, and it made his position 
more serious than ever. It made his 
position completely hopeless. 

He laughed, shortly. 

The hell with it, gentlemen! I’ll 
cheat you yet! 

There was no point in trying to 
reach the storeroom. It might gain 
him an hour or two, nothing more. 
And they would be after him very 
soon now, many of them, far more 
than he could ever handle. 

There was just one thing left to 
do. 

Sam turned, picked his way over 
the prone bodies, and went back the 
way he had come. It was easier with 
the lights on, easier with decent air 
in his lungs, easier now that he 
wasn’t burning up with thirst. But 
as he walked the reaction caught 
up with him, the adrenalin of battle 
faded, and his legs wobbled precari- 
ously. 

He almost made it before he fell 
down, and then he just crawled the 
rest of the way. 

The faded sign was the same: 

DANGER. LOCK FOUR. DANGER. 

The massive metal door still 
gleamed in the very side of the Ship. 
Beyond that airlock — 


THE WIND BLOWS FREE 


21 


Well, no matter. He was through, 
cither way. 

He pulled himself to his feet, 
grasped the wheel in the middle of 
the great door, twisted it. 

The siren exploded into fury again, 
but this time he was ready for it. 
He ignored the bedlam, kept on turn- 
ing the wheel. It came more easily 
now, loosening up, it was spin- 
ning— 

There was a rasping creak he 
could hear above the siren’s scream. 

Sam’s hand dropped from the cold 
metal wheel. In spite of himself, he 
backed away, holding his breath. 

The airlock door opened with a 
hiss. 

At that precise moment, he heard 
a chorus of cries that cut through 
the racket of the siren. A glance 
down the tunnel showed a troop of 
Crewmen advancing through the 
smoke-like dust. 

Sam waved his hand at them 
tauntingly. 

Without hesitation, he stepped 
through the airlock door. He found 
himself in a small metal chamber. 
Remembering the films he had seen, 
he jabbed a green button on a wall 
panel. The great door through 
which he had come hissed shut again, 
just before the others reached it. 

That door could not be opened 
again from the Ship as long as he 
was inside the airlock. 

He looked around him. There was 
little to see. The lock was a small 
one, perhaps ten feet square. It had 


been painted a dull gray, but the 
paint had peeled and cracked, show- 
ing the dark metal beneath. 

The chamber was quite empty. 

There was no providential space- 
suit. 

Sam stepped across to the circular 
portal at the far end of the airlock. 
He touched it with his finger. It 
felt cold. Just to the right of the 
portal there was another panel. The 
panel had a red button set into it. 

Sam reached out to press the but- 
ton. 

His finger trembled so violently 
that he missed it altogether. 

It was all very well to make up 
your mind to do something that 
went against your very soul. It was 
all very well to be convinced that 
you were going to do it. It was all 
very well to try to do it. 

But beyond this last door was Out- 
side. 

Outside the Ship. 

Outside the world. 

Outside, past the sandy beaches of 
a warm and tiny island, out into the 
vastnesses of a desolate sea, cold and 
empty beyond belief. Out into space 
itself, out into a nightmare death 
that had haunted you from child- 
hood. . . . 

A hollow clanging filled the cham- 
ber. 

The Crewmen were trying to bat- 
ter the inner door down. 

Sam took a deep breath, and held 
it. He pressed the red button. He 
felt a cool current against his body 
as air began to cycle. 


22 

The circular portal creaked and 
hissed. 

It began to open. 

Sam closed his eyes, held his 
breath with maniac ferocity. 

He counted to ten. 

He squared his shoulders and 
walked forward. He walked 
through the port. He was Outside — 

He began to fall. 

God, can I have guessed right, 
why don’t I explode, why can’t I 
feel anything. . . . 

He hit something with a numbing 
crash. The something gave under 
the impact; it was flexible. It ripped 
at his arms and legs as he fell — 

Then it stopped. 

It was over. 

Sam couldn’t hold his breath any 
longer. His lungs were bursting, his 
eyes bulging from their sockets. He 
opened his mouth, gasped, swal- 
lowed. 

Air! 

The face-mask could only filter 
air; there had to be air there in the 
first place. And that meant — 

Sam opened his eyes. 

Green. 

Yellow. 

Red. 

Blacl{. 

Colors! A riot of colors! He had 
never seen such colors; they stunned 
his eyes. He looked up, past a tangle 
of green. Light! Bright, golden light. 

A sun. 

Sam reached up, ripped off his 
face-mask. 

An avalanche of smells almost 


FANTASY AND SCIENCE FICTION 

smothered him. It was like his hy- 
droponics room, but magnified a 
million times. He smelled green 
growing things, flowers, trees — 

Life. 

He had been living in a dead 
world, a counterfeit world, and here 
was the real thing, dazzling, incred- 
ible, wonderful, overpowering. A 
gentle breeze ruffled the leaves over 
his head, a sweet living breeze he 
could taste in his mouth. 

Sam tried his body gingerly. No 
bones were broken, as far as he could 
tell. He reached out and pulled the 
sticky green vines apart, making a 
hole. He began to inch along pain- 
fully, like a worm, sucking in the 
earth-moist air as he went. He 
forced his way through a tangled 
miracle of underbrush for some 
twenty long minutes, and then he 
found himself in a small clearing. 

There was water in the clearing, 
a little spring bubbling up from an 
outcropping of glistening black 
rocks. Sam stared at it; it seemed 
to him that he had never seen any- 
thing so beautiful. Tiny brown root- 
lets trailed down into the pale water. 
There were clean white pebbles on 
the bottom, all worn and smooth. 
He could see the pebbles in exact de- 
tail, almost as though the water 
magnified them, but when he thrust 
his arm into the spring he could not 
reach bottom. 

Sam cupped the cold water in his 
dirty hands and drank it. He had 
never tasted water so sweet, so 
charged with vitality. 


THE WIND BLOWS FREE 


23 


He stood Hp on shaking legs. He 
looked back the way he had come. 

He saw a sight he would never 
forget. 

There was the Ship, the mighty 
Ship, rearing its bulk toward an elec- 
tric blue sky. There was the Ship, 
the world he had known, and it 
was a dead thing, a defeated thing. 

Its once-bright sides were dull 
with rust and corrosion. Its once- 
powerful jets were buried in dirt 
and brambles. Its once-proud out- 
line was blurred by the tangled 
green ropes of creepers and vines. 

There was the Ship, there was his 
world : buried beneath the decay and 
the growth of centuries. 

The Ship had landed; that was 
obvious enough. It had touched 
down long ago, generations ago. It 
had found the world it had sought, 
the world that might give his peo- 
ple another chance. 

The great journey had ended hun- 
dreds of years ago. 

And the passengers ? 

They had stayed in the Ship. 

They had been afraid to come out. 

They had built their little safe 
sterile society in their metal tube of 
a world, and they had been afraid to 
start again. They remembered what 
had happened on Earth; they were 
never allowed to forget. A lifetime 
of warnings buzzed through Sam’s 
brain: 

‘‘You must be careful, you must be 
wise. . . ." 

“Taf{e no chances. . . 

“Better to be safe than sorry. . . 


Sam had known, somehow. A part 
of him had always known. This was 
the secret the Crewmen hid from 
their people. This was why the use- 
less control room was guarded, even 
in the midnight hours. This was 
why the Crewmen had to be se- 
lected so carefully. This was why 
they had feared him, hated him, 
stifled him — 

Sam felt the warm sun on his 
neck, tasted the living air in his 
mouth, smelled the breeze that had 
kissed the flowers and the trees and 
the blue vault of the skies. 

And he threw back his head and 
laughed, laughed with the sheer 
blind exultation of being alive. 

He flopped down on the ground 
by the bubbling spring, pillowed his 
head in his arms, and was asleep in 
seconds. 

When Sam woke up, the world 
was dark around him — dark and yet 
shot with a luminous gray that told 
him that dawn was near. He had no 
idea how long he had slept, since 
he did not know the planet’s period 
of rotation, but he felt rested and 
ready to go. 

He was cold, ahd his body was 
stiff and sore. The ground that had 
seemed so warm in the sunlight was 
chill and damp now, and there were 
tiny beads of moisture on the grass 
stems. The stars were fading as 
light seeped over the horizon, but 
they still dusted the heavens with 
their glory. 

He drank some more water, but 


24 

it failed to fill the emptiness that 
gnawed inside him. He searched his 
pockets, but he had no food left. 
He stood there and shivered, half 
smiling at his own plight. 

He didn’t know how to build a 
fire. 

He didn’t know what berries or 
nuts were safe to eat. 

He had no weapons. 

He listened, almost holding his 
breath. He heard the world around 
him, the world he could not see. 
He heard sounds he had never heard 
on the Ship; the very air was filled 
with rustlings and sighings and a 
vague thump as something heavy 
moved in the brush. 

Sam stood quietly, watching the 
sunrise. He felt as though he were 
just being born, coming forth as a 
man after an eternity of not-life in- 
side a great metal egg. . . . 

The sun came up slowly, taking 
its own sweet time, doing the job 
right. It bathed the world in soft 
pastels, in rose and soft yellow and 
rich brown. It warmed the ground, 
the leaves, the grasses. It rolled into 
the sky, almost timidly, and looked 
down on itself, smiling into the 
chuckles of the spring. 

Sam looked again at the Ship. It 
was a sad thing in the sunlight, a 
tragic thing. It looked like the tomb- 
stone placed over the grave of a 
giant. It was hard to believe that 
people lived and loved and died 
within those metal walls; it was as 
if the ancient Egyptians of Earth 
had sealed their society inside a vast 


FANTASY AND SCIENCE FICTION 

pyramid, trying to preserve it for 
the ages. . . . 

Sam felt no anger now, not even 
triumph. The green world around 
him was too big for that. Instead, 
watching that rusting hulk being 
strangled in the patient coils of the 
vines, he felt the beginnings of com- 
passion, of understanding. 

ril be bac\, he thought. One day 
I’ll be bac\. 

And then the irony of it welled 
up within him. O my people! The 
door was always open to you, the 
door into sunlight and warmth and 
life. The door was always open, if 
you only had the courage to wal\ 
through it! 

He turned and set out toward a 
low range of bluish hiHs, still half 
hidden by mist. He was desperately 
hungry, with no way of getting 
food, but happiness was in him like 
a song. He knew he was on the 
threshold of a new life, he \new 
that more miracles waited for him 
beneath that alien, golden sun. He 
had only to keep going, to walk 
far enough and long enough — 

He smelled the smoke first. 

He was walking through a clump 
of tall, cool trees, relishing the 
spongy softness of the leaves on the 
forest floor. He caught a whiff of 
woodsmoke, heavy and pungent 
with the tang of broiling meat. He 
walked faster, almost running, trail- 
ing the smoke. 

He came to the edge of a sea of 
grass, a rolling meadow of green. 
He saw the orange fire at the very 


THE WIND BLOWS FREE 


25 


edge of the timber, blazing up with 
sap-rich hissings and cracklings. 
He smelled the dripping meat hang- 
ing over the flames. . . . 

He saw the men, three of them, 
standing around the fire. Big men, 
men his own size, their muscles as 
golden as the sun in the sky. They 
saw him, smiled at him, waved to 
him. 

Sam waved back. He knew there 


was nothing to fear here, and hur- 
ried toward the fire with a steady, 
eager step. He walked proudly, his 
head erect, his heart full. 

And Sam Kingsley heard at last 
that far, free wind that stirs the 
world. He felt within him the deep 
beat of a living sea, and knew that 
he had found peace at the end of 
his journey, a peace as bright with 
promise as the morning sun. 


If you enjoy The Magazine of Fantasy and Science Fiction, you will enjoy 
some of the other Mercury Publications. 

• VENTURE — Powerful, shocking science fiction stories of action and ad- 

venture. Featured in the current issue are stories by James E. Gunn, H. 
Beam Piper, C. M. Kornbluth, and others. 

• ELLERY QUEEN’S MYSTERY MAGAZINE— Tz&e July issue, now on 

sale leads off with a brand-new Ellery Queen story, ’’Miracles Do Hap- 
pen,” and features tales by Dorothy Salisbury Davis, Helen McCloy, Agatha 
Christie and others, plus a terrifying insight into Juvenile Delinquency, 
’’The Doe and the Gantlet,” by Pat Stadley. 

• MERCURY MYSTERY BOOK-MAGAZINE— Albert’s featured, 

original novel ’’Five Hours to Live,” — story of a boy out for vengeance on 
the town that branded him a thief — is accompanied by a taut William 
Campbell Gault story, plus pieces by Erie Stanley Gardner and others. 

• BESTSELLER MYSTERY— ''Do«V Look Back,” by Miriam Borgenicht. 

Abridged edition. "Sheer suspense . . . brilliantly sustained,” says the New 
York Times of this story of a girl’s terror-stricken flight from kidnappers 
in a corrupt town. 

• JONATHAN PRESS MYSTERY— 'T/&e Basle Express,” by Manning 

Coles. Abridged edition. British Agent Tommy Hambledon has his vacation 
interrupted by international gangsters out for blood, money and the free 
world’s secrets, ’’. . . fast-paced, and funny’,’ says the San Francisco News. 


Cecil Corwin was once a prolific and brilliant writer of science fiction. 
You’ll find 43 entries, under his own name and his many pseudonyms, 
in Donald Day’s INDEX; he has appeared in F&SF (The Mask of De- 
meter, January, 1953) and he once received a Jules Verne Award. If 
y Old re wondering why you have not seen Mr. Corwin’s name in print 
recently, you’ll find the answer (along with at least part of The An- 
swer) in one of the oddest stories ever to turn up on even this 
editorial desk. 


>JMS, Found in a Chinese Fortune Coo\ie 

hy C. M. KORNBLUTH 


They say i am mad, but i am not 
mad — damn it, I’ve written and 
sold two million words of fiction 
and I know better than to start a 
story like that, but this isn’t a story 
and they do say I’m mad — cata- 
tonic schizophrenia with assaultive 
episodes — and I’m not, YThis is 
clearly the first of the Corwin Pa- 
pers. Like all the others it is writ- 
ten on a Riz-lM cigarette paper 
with a ball point pen. Lifie all the 
others it is headed: Urgent. Finder 
please send to C. M. Kornbluth, 
Wantagh, N. Y. Reward! / might 
comment that this is typical of Cor- 
win’s generosity with his friends’ 
time and money, though his atti- 
tude is at least this once justified 
by his desperate plight. As his 
longtime friend and, indeed, liter- 
ary executor, I was clearly the 


person to turn to. CMK] I have to 
convince you, Cyril, that I am both 
sane and the victim of an enor- 
mous conspiracy — and that you are 
too, and that everybody is. A tall 
order, but I am going to try to fill 
it by writing an orderly account 
of the events leading up to my 
present situation. [Here ends the first 
paper. To fieep the record clear I 
should state that it was forwarded 
to me by a Mr. L. Wilmot Shaw 
who found it in a fortune cookie 
he ordered for dessert at the Great 
China Republic Restaurant in San 
Francisco. Mr. Shaw suspected it 
was “a publicity gag" but sent it 
to me nonetheless, and received by 
return mail my thanks and my 
check for one dollar. I had not 
realized that Corwin and his wife 
had disappeared from their home 


26 


MS. FOUND IN A CHINESE FORTUNE COOKIE 


27 


at Painted Post; I was merely aware 
that it had been weeks since I'd 
heard from him. We visited infre- 
quently. To be blunt, he was easier 
to take via mail than face to face. 
For the balance of this account 1 
shall attempt to avoid tedium by 
omitting the provenance of each 
paper, except when noteworthy, 
and its length. The first is typical — 
a little over a hundred words. I 
have, of course, kept on file all 
correspondence relating to the 
papers, and am eager to display it 
to the authorities. It is hoped that 
publication of this account will 
nudge them out of the apathy with 
which they have so far greeted my 
attempts to engage them. CMK\ 

On Sunday, May 13, 1956, at about 
12:30 pju., I learned The Answer. 
I was stiff and aching because all 
Saturday my wife and I had been 
putting in young fruit trees. I like 
to dig, but I was badly out of con- 
dition from an unusually long and 
idle winter. Creatively, I felt fine. 
I’d been stale for months, but when 
spring came the sap began to run 
in me too. I was bursting with story 
ideas; scenes and stretches of dialog 
were jostling one another in my 
mind; all I had to do was let them 
flow onto paper. 

When The Answer popped into 
my head I thought at first it was 
an idea for a story — a very good 
story. I was going to go downstairs 
and bounce it off my wife a few 
times to test it, but I heard the 
sewing machine buzzing and re- 


membered she had said she was 
way behind on her mending. In- 
stead, I put my feet up, stared 
blankly through the window at the 
pasture-and-wooded-hills View we’d 
bought the old place for, and fondled 
the idea. 

What about, I thought, using the 
idea to develop a messy little local 
situation, the case of Mrs. Clon- 
ford.'* Mrs. C. is a neighbor, animal- 
happy, land-poor and uninten- 
tionally a fearsome oppressor of her 
husband and children. Mr. C. is a 
retired brakeman with a pension 
and his wife insists on him making 
like a farmer in all weathers and 
every year he gets pneumonia and 
is pulled through with antibiotics. 
All he wants is to sell the damned 
farm and retire with his wife to a 
little apartment in town. All she 
wants is to mess around with her 
cows and horses and sub-marginal 
acreage. 

I got to thinking that if you 
noised the story around with a com- 
ment based on The Answer, the 
situation would automatically un- 
tangle. They’d get their apartment, 
sell the farm and everybody would 
be happy, including Mrs. C. It would 
be interesting to write, I thought 
idly, and then I thought not so idly 
that it would be interesting to try — 
and then I sat up sharply with a 
dry mouth and a systemful of ad- 
renalin. It would work' The An- 
swer would work. 

I ran rapidly down a list of other 
problems, ranging from the town 


28 

drunk to the guided-missile race. The 
Answer worked. Every time. 

I was quite sure I had turned 
paranoid, because I’ve seen so much 
of that kind of thing in science 
fiction. Anybody can name a dozen 
writers, editors and fans who have 
suddenly seen the light and deter- 
mined to lead the human race on- 
ward and upward out of the old 
slough. Of course The Answer 
looked logical and unassailable, but 
so no doubt did poor Charlie Mc- 
Gandress’ project to unite man- 
kind through science fiction fan- 
dom, at least to him. So, no doubt, 
did [/ have here omitted several 
briefly sketched case histories of sci- 
ence fiction personalities as yet un- 
committed. The reason will be ob- 
vious to anyone familiar with the 
law of libel. Suffice it to say that 
Corwin argues that science fiction 
attracts an unstable type of mind 
and sometimes insidiously under- 
mines its foundations on reality. 
CMK] 

But I couldn’t just throw it away 
without a test. I considered the 
wording carefully, picked up the 
extension phone on my desk and 
dialed Jim Howlett, the appliance 
dealer in town. He answered. “Cor- 
win, Jim,” I told him. “I have an 
idea — oops! The samovar’s boiling 
over. Call me back in a minute, 
will you?” I hung up. 

He called me back in a minute; 
I let our combination — two shorts 
and a long — ring three times before 
I picked up the phone. “What was 


FANTASY AND SCIENCii FICTION 

that about a samovar?” he asked, 
baffled. 

“Just kidding,” I said. “Listen 
Jim, why don’t you try a short story 
for a change of pace? Knock off 
the novel for a while — ” He’s hope- 
fully writing a big historical about 
the SulHvan Campaign of 1779, 
which is our local chunk of the 
Revolutionary War; I’m helping 
him a little with advice. Anybody 
who wants as badly as he docs to 
get out of the appliance business is 
entitled to some help. 

“Gee, I don’t know,” he said. As 
he spoke the volume of his voice 
dropped slightly but definitely, three 
times. That meant we had an av- 
erage quota of party line snoopers 
listening in. “What would I write 
about?” 

“Well, we have this situation with 
a neighbor, Mrs. Clonford,” I be- 
gan. I went through the problem 
and made my comment based on 
The Answer. I heard one of the 
snoopers gasp. Jim said when I was 
finished: “I don’t really think it’s 
for me, Cecil. Of course it was nice 
of you to call, but — ” 

Eventually a customer came into 
the store and he had to break off. 

I went through an anxious crabby 
twenty-four hours. 

On Monday afternoon the paper 
woman drove past our place and 
shot the rolled-up copy of the Pott 
Hill Evening Times into the orange- 
painted tube beside our mailbox. I 
raced for it, yanked it open to the 
seventh page and read : 


MS. FOUND IN A CHINESE FORTUNE COOKIE 


29 


“FARM SALE 

Owing to 111 Health and Age 
Mr. & Mrs. Ronald Clonford 
Will sell their Entire Farm, All 
Machinery and Furnishings and 
All Live Stock at Auction Sat- 
urday May 19 12:30 P.M. Rain 
or Shine, Terms Cash Day of 
Sale, George Pfennig, 

Auctioneer.” 

[This is one of the few things in 
the Corwin Papers which can be 
independently verified. I loo\ed up 
the paper and found that the ad 
was run about as quoted. Further, 
I interviewed Mrs. Clonford in her 
town apartment. She told me she 
"just got tired of farmin’, I guess. 
Kind of hated to give up my ponies, 
but people was beginning to say it 
was too hard of a life for Ronnie 
and I guess they was right'.’ CMK\ 
Coincidence.'* Perhaps. I went up- 
stairs with the paper and put my 
feet up again. I could try a hundred 
more piddling tests if I wished, but 
why waste time? If there was any- 
thing to it, I could type out The 
Answer in about two hundred 
words, drive to town, tack it on the 
bulletin board outside the firehouse 
and — snowball. Avalanche! 

I didn’t do it, of course — for the 
same reason I haven’t put down the 
two hundred words of The Answer 
yet on a couple of these cigarette 
papers. It’s rather dreadful — isn’t it 
— that I haven’t done so, that a 
simple feasible plan to ensure peace, 
progress and equality of opportunity 


among all mankind, may be lost to 
the world if, say, a big meteorite 
hits the asylum in the next couple 
of minutes. But — I’m a writer. 
There’s a touch of intellectual sad- 
ism in us. We like to dominate the 
reader as a matador dominates the 
bull; we like to tease and mystify 
and at last show what great souls 
we are by generously flipping up 
the shade and letting the sunshine 
in. Don’t worry. Read on. You will 
come to The Answer in the proper 
artistic place for it. [At this point I 
wish fervently to dissociate myself 
from the attitudes Corwin attributes 
to our profession. He had — has, I 
hope — his eccentricities, and I con~ 
sider it inexcusable of him to tar us 
all with his personal brush. I could 
point out, for example, that he once 
laboriously cultivated a 16th Cen- 
tury handwriting which was utterly 
illegible to the modern reader. The 
only reason apparent for this, as for 
so many of his traits, seemed to be 
a wish to annoy as many people as 
possible. CMK\ 

Yes; I am a writer. A matador 
does not show up in the bull ring 
with a tommy gun and a writer 
doesn’t do things the simple, direct 
way. He makes the people writhe 
a little first. So I called Fred Green- 
wald. Fred had been after me for 
a while to speak at one of the Thurs- 
day Rotary meetings and I’d been 
reluctant to set a date. I have a little 
speech for such occasions, “The 
Business of Being a Writer” — all 
about the archaic royalty system of 


30 

payment, the difficulty of proving 
business expenses, the Margaret 
Mitchell tax law and hoW it badly 
needs improvement, what copyright 
is and isn’t, how about all these 
generals and politicians with their 
capital-gains memoirs. I pass a few 
galley sheets down the table and 
generally get a good laugh by hold- 
ing up a Doubleday book contract, 
silently turning it over so they can 
see how the fine print goes on and 
on, and then flipping it open so 
they see there’s twice as much fine 
print as they thought there was. I 
had done my stuff for Oswego Ro- 
tary, Horseheads Rotary and Can- 
non Hole Rotary; now Fred wanted 
me to do it for Painted Post Rotary. 

So I phoned him and said I’d be 
willing to speak this coming Thurs- 
day. Good, he said. On a discovery 
I’d made about the philosophy and 
technique of administration and in- 
terpersonal relationships, I said. He 
sort of choked up and said well, 
we’re broadminded here. 

I’ve got to start cutting this. I 
have several packs of cigarette 
papers left but not enough to cover 
the high spots if I’m to do them 
justice. Let’s just say the announce- 
ment of my speech was run in the 
Tuesday paper [It was. CMK\ and 
skip to Wednesday, my place, about 
7:30 p.M. Dinner was just over and 
my wife and I were going to walk 
out and see how [At this point I 
wish to insert a special note con- 
cerning some difficulty I had in 
obtaining the next jour papers. They 


FANTASY AND SCIENCE FICTION 

got somehow into the hands of a 
certain literary agent who is famous 
for a sort of “finders-\eepers'’ at- 
titude more appropriate to the 
eighth grade than to the law of 
literary property. In disregard of the 
fact that Corwin retained physical 
ownership of the papers and liter- 
ary rights thereto, and that 1 as 
the addressee possessed all other 
rights, he was blandly endeavoring 
to sell them to various magazines 
as "curious fragments from Corwin’s 
desl('. Lil{e most people, 1 abhor 
lawsuits; that’s the fact this agent 
lives on. I met his outrageous price 
of five cents a word "plus post- 
age( ! ).’’ I should add that I have 
not heard of any attempt by this 
gentleman to locate Corwin or his 
heirs in order to turn over the pro- 
ceeds of the sale, less commission. 
CMK] the new fruit trees were 
doing when a car came bumping 
down our road and stopped at our 
garden fence gate. 

“See what they want and shove 
them on their way,” said my wife. 
“We haven’t got much daylight left.” 
She peered through tbe kitchen 
window at the car, blinked, rubbed 
her eyes and peered again. She said 
uncertainly: “It looks like — no! 
Can’t be.” I went out to the car. 

“Anything I can do for you.'”’ I 
asked the two men in the front 
seat. Then I recognized them. One 
of them was about my age, a wiry 
lad in a T-shirt. The other man 
was plump and graying and min- 
isterial, but jolly. They were un- 


MS. FOUND IN A CHINESE FORTUNE COOKIE 


31 


mistakable; they had looked out at 
me — one scowling, the other smil- 
ing — from a hundred book ads. It 
was almost incredible that they 
knew each other, but there they were 
sharing a car. 

I greeted them by name and said: 
“This is odd. I happen to be a 
writer myself. I’ve never shared the 
best-seller list with you two, but — ” 

The plump ministerial man tut- 
tutted. “You are thinking nega- 
tively,” he chided me. “Think of 
what you have accomplished. You 
own this lovely home, the valuation 
of which has just been raised two 
thousand dollars due entirely to the 
hard work and frugality of you and 
your lovely wife; you give innocent 
pleasure to thousands with your 
clever novels; you help to keep the 
good local merchants going with 
your patronage. Not least, you have 
fought for your country in the wars 
and you support it with your taxes.” 

The man in the T-shirt said 
raspily: “Even if you din’t have the 
dough to settle in full on April 15 
and will have to pay six per cent 
per month interest on the unpaid 
balance when and if you ever do 
pay it, you poor shnook.” 

The plump man said, distressed: 
“Please, Michael — you are not think- 
ing positively. This is neither the 
time nor the place — ” 

“What’s going on?” I demanded. 
Because I hadn’t even told my wije 
I’d been a little short on the ’55 
federal tax, 

“Let’s go inna house,” said the 


T-shirted man. He got out of the 
car, brushed my gate open and 
walked coolly down the path to the 
kitchen door. The plump man fol- 
lowed, sniffing our rose-scented gar- 
den air appreciatively, and I came 
last of all, on wobbly legs. 

When we filed in my wife said: 
“My God. It is them.” 

The man in the T-shirt said: 
“Hiya, babe,” and stared at her 
breasts. The plump man said: “May 
I compliment you, my dear, for a 
splendid rose garden. Quite unusual 
for this altitude.” 

“Thanks,” she said faintly, begin- 
ning to rally, “But it’s quite easy 
when your neighbors keep horses.” 

“Haw!” snorted the man in the 
T-shirt. “That’s the stuff, babe. You 
grow roses like I write books. Give 
’em plenty of — ” 

“Michael!” said the plump man. 

“Loo^, you,” my wife said to me. 
“Would you mind telling me what 
this is all about? I never knew you 
knew Dr. — ” 

“I don’t,” I said helplessly. “They 
seem to want to talk to me.” 

“Let us adjourn to your sanctum 
sanctorum," said the plump man 
archly, and we went upstairs. The 
T-shirted man sat on the couch, the 
plump fellow sat in the club chair 
and I collapsed on the swivel chair 
in front of the typewriter. “Drink, 
anybody?” I asked, wanting one my- 
self. “Sherry, brandy, rye, straight 
angostura?” 

“Never touch the stinking stuff,” 
grunted the man in the T-shirt. 


32 


FANTASY AND SCIENCE FICTION 


“I would enjoy a nip of brandy,” 
said the big man. We each had one 
straight, no chasers, and he got 
down to business with: “I suppose 
you have discovered The Diagonal 
Relationship ? ” 

I thought about The Answer, and 
decided that The Diagonal Relation- 
ship would be a very good name for 
it too. “Yes,” I said. “I guess I have. 
Have you?” 

“I have. So has Michael here. So 
have one thousand, seven hundred 
and twenty-four writers. If you’d 
like to know who they are, pick 
the one thousand, seven hundred 
and twenty-four top-income men of 
the ten thousand free-lance writers 
in this country and you have your 
men. The Diagonal Relationship is 
discovered on an average of three 
times a year by rising writers.” 

“Writers,” I said. “Good God, why 
writers? Why not economists, psy- 
chologists, mathematicians — real 
thinkers?” 

He said: “A writer’s mind is an 
awesome thing, Corwin. What went 
into your discovery of The Diagonal 
Relationship?” 

I thought a bit. “I’m doing a Civil 
War thing about Burnside’s Bomb,” 
I said, “and I realized that Grant 
could have sent in fresh troops but 
didn’t because Halleck used to drive 
him crazy by telegraphic master- 
minding of his campaigns. That’s 
a special case of The Answer — as I 
call it. Then I got some data on 
medieval attitudes toward personal 
astrology out of a book on ancient 


China I’m reading. Another special 
case. And there’s a joke the monks 
used to write at the end of a long 
manuscript-copying job. Liddell 
Hart’s theory of strategy is about 
half of the general military case of 
The Answer. The merchandizing 
special case shows clearly in a cata- 
log I have from a Chicago store 
that specializes in selling strange 
clothes to bop-crazed Negroes. They 
all add up to the general expression, 
and that’s that.” 

He was nodding. “Many, many 
combinations add up to The Di- 
agonal Relationship,” he said. “But 
only a writer cuts across sufficient 
fields, exposes himself to sufficient 
apparently unrelated facts. Only a 
writer has wide-open associational 
channels capable of bridging the gap 
between astrology and, ah, ‘bop.’ 
We write in our different idioms” — 
he smiled at the T-shirted man — 
“but we are writers all. Wide-rang- 
ing, omnivorous for data, equipped 
with superior powers of association 
which we constantly exercise.” 

“Well,” I asked logically enough, 
“why on earth haven’t you pub- 
lished The Diagonal Relationship? 
Are you here to keep me from 
publishing it?” 

“We’re a power group,” said the 
plump man apologetically. “We have 
a vested interest in things as they 
are. Think about what The Diag- 
onal Relationship would do to 
writers, Corwin.” 

“Sure,” I said, and thought about 
it. “Judas Priest!” I said after a 


MS. FOUND IN A CHINESE FORTUNE COOKIE 


33 


couple of minutes. He was nodding 
again. He said: “Yes. The Diagonal 
Relationship, if generally promul- 
gated, would work out to approxi- 
mate equality of income for all, with 
incentive pay only for really hard 
and dangerous work. Writing would 
be regarded as pretty much its own 
reward.” 

“That’s the way it looks,” I said. 
“One-year copyright, after all . . .” 

[Here occurs the first hiatus in 
the Corwin Papers. I suspect that 
three or jour are missing. The pre- 
ceding and following papers, in- 
cidentally, come from a batch of six 
gross of fortune cookies which I 
purchased from the Hip Sing Res- 
taurant Provision Company of New 
York City during the course of my 
investigations. The reader no doubt 
will wonder why I was unable to 
determine the source of the cookies 
themselves and was forced to buy 
them from middlemen. Apparently 
the reason is the fantastic one that 
by chance I was wearing a white 
shirt, dark tie and double-breasted 
blue serge suit when I attempted to 
question the proprietor of the Hip 
Sing Company. 1 learned too late 
that this is just about the unofficial 
uniform of U. S. Treasury and 
justice Department agents and that 
1 was immediately taken to be such 
an agent. “You T-man," said Mr. 
Hip tolerantly, “you get cou’t oh- 
dah, I show you books. Keep ve’y 
nice books, all in Chinese cha’ctahs." 
After that gambit he would answer 
me only in Chinese. How he did it 


I have no idea, but apparently within 
days every Chinese produce dealer 
in the United States and Canada 
had been notified that there was^ 
a new T-man named Kornbluth on 
the prowl. As a last resort I called 
on the New York office of the 
Treasury Department Field Investi- 
gations Unit in an attempt to obtain 
what might be called un-identifica- 
tion papers. There I was assured by 
Mr. Gershon O’Brien, their Chi- 
nese specialist, that my errand was 
hopeless since the motto of Mr. Hip 
and his colleagues invariably was 
“Safety First.’’ To make matters 
worse, as I left his office I was 
greeted with a polite smile from a 
Chinese lad whom I recognized as 
Mr. Hip’s bookkeeper. CMK\ 

“So you see,” he went on as if he 
had just stated a major and a minor 
premise, “we watch the writers, the 
real ones, through private detective 
agencies which alert us when the 
first teaser appears in a newspaper 
or on a broadcast or in local gossip. 
There’s always the teaser, Corwin, 
the rattle before the strike. We 
writers are like that. We’ve been 
watching you for three years now, 
and to be perfectly frank I’ve lost 
a few dollars wagered on you. In 
my opinion you’re a year late.” 

“What’s the proposition.?” I asked 
numbly. 

He shrugged. “You get to be a 
best-seller. We review your books, 
you review ours. We tell your 
publisher : ‘Corwin’s hot — promote 
him. Advertise him.’ And he does, 


34 


FANTASY AND SCIENCE FICTION 


because we’re good properties and 
he doesn’t want to annoy us. You 
want Hollywood? It can be ar- 
ranged. Lots of us out there. In 
short, you become rich Hke us and 
all you have to do is keep quiet 
about The Diagonal Relationship. 
You haven’t told your wife, by the 
way?” 

“I wanted to surprise her,” I said. 

He smiled. “They always do. 
Writers! Well, young man, what do 
you say?” 

It had grown dark. From the 
couch came a raspy voice: “You 
heard what the doc said about the 
ones that throw in with us. I’m 
here to tell you that we got pro- 
visions for the ones that don’t.” 

I laughed at him. 

“One of those guys,” be said 
flatly. 

“Surely a borderline case, Mi- 
chael?” said the plump man. “So 
many of them are.” 

If I’d been thinking straight I 
would have realized that “border- 
line case” did not mean “undecided” 
to them; it meant “danger — imme- 
diate action!” 

They took it. The plump man, 
who was also a fairly big man, flung 
his arms around me and the wiry 
one approached in the gloom. I 
yelled something when I felt a hy- 
podermic stab my arm. Then I went 
numb and stupid. 

My wife, came running up the 
stairs. “What’s going on?” she de- 
manded. I saw her heading for the 
curtain behind which we keep an 


aged hair-trigger Marlin 38 rifle. 
There was nothing wrong with her 
guts, but they attacked her where 
courage doesn’t count. I croaked her 
name a couple of times and heard 
the plump man say gently, with 
great concern: “I’m afraid your hus- 
band needs . . . help.” She turned 
from the curtain, her eyes wide. He 
had struck subtly and knowingly; 
there is probably not one writer’s 
wife who does not suspect her hus- 
band is a potential psychotic. 

“Dear — ” she said to me as I 
stood there paralyzed. 

He went on: “Michael and I 
dropped in because we both admire 
your husband’s work; we were sur- 
prised and distressed to find his 
conversation so . . . disconnected. 
My dear, as you must know I have 
some experience through my pas- 
torate with psychotherapy. Have you 
ever — forgive my bluntness — had 
doubts about his sanity?” 

“Dear, what’s the matter?” she 
asked me anxiously. I just stood 
there, staring. God knows what they 
injected me with, but its effect was 
to cloud my mind, render all ac- 
tivity impossible, send my thoughts 
spinning after their tails. I was in- 
sane. [This incident, seemingly the 
least plausible part of Corwins 
story, actually stands up better than 
most of the narrative to one familiar 
with recent advances in biochem- 
istry. Corwin could have been in- 
fected with lysergic acid, or with 
protein extracts from the blood of 
psychotics. It is a matter, of cold 


MS. FOUND IN A CHINESE FORTUNE COOKIE 


35 


laboratory fact that such injections 
produce temporary psychosis in the 
patient. Indeed, it is on such ex- 
perimental psychoses that the new 
tranquilizer drugs are developed 
and tested. CMK] 

To herself she said aloud, dully: 
“Well, it’s finally come. Christmas 
when I burned the turkey and he 
wouldn’t speak to me for a week. 
The way he drummed his fingers 
when I talked. All his little crackpot 
ways— how he has to stay at the 
Walddrf but I have to cut his hair 
and save a dollar. I hoped it was 
just the rotten weather and cabin 
fever. I hoped when spring came — ” 
She began to sob. The plump man 
comforted her like a father. I just 
stood there staring and waiting. 
And eventually Mickey glided up 
in the dark and gave her a needle- 
ful too and 

[Here occurs an aggravating and 
important hiatus. One can only 
guess that Corwin and his wife were 
loaded into the car, driven — Some- 
where, separated, and separately, 
under false names, committed to 
different mental institutions. I have 
recently learned to my dismay that 
there are states which require only 
the barest sort of licensing to op- 
erate such institutions. One State 
Inspector of Hospitals even wrote 
to me in these words: . , no 

doubt there are some places in our 
State which are not even licensed, 
but we have never made any effort 
to close them and I cannot recall 
any statute making such operation 


illegal. We are not a wealthy state 
like you up North and some care 
for these unfortunates is better than 
none, is our viewpoint here. . , ." 
CMK] 

three months. Their injections 
last a week. There’s always some- 
body to give me another. You 
know what mental hospital attend- 
ants are like; an easy bribe. But 
they’d be better advised to bribe a 
higher type, like a male nurse, be- 
cause my attendant with the special 
needle for me is off on a drunk. 
My insanity wore off this morning 
and I’ve been writing in my room 
ever since. A quick trip up and 
down the corridor collected the 
cigarette papers and a tiny ball point 
pen from some breakfast-food pre- 
mium gadget. I think my best bet 
is to slip these papers out in the 
batch of Chinese fortune cookies 
they’re doing in the bakery. Occupa- 
tional therapy, this is called. My 
own o.t. is shoveling coal when I’m 
under the needle. Well, enough of 
this. I shall write down The An- 
swer, slip down to the bakery, de.al 
out the cigarette papers into the 
waiting rounds of cookie dougli, 
crimp them over and return to my 
room. Doubtless my attendant will 
be back by then and I’ll get an- 
other shot from him. I shall not 
struggle; I can only wait. 

The Answer: human beings 

RAISED TO SPEAK AN INDO-IRANIAN 
LANGUAGE SUCH AS ENGLISH HAVE THE 
FOLLOWING IN 

[That is the end of the last of the 


36 


FANTASV AND SCIENCE FICTION 


Corwin Papers I have been able to 
locate. It should be superfluous to 
urge all readers to examine care- 
fully any fortune coo\ie slips they 
may encounter. The next one you 
brea\ open may contain what my 
poor friend believed, or believes, to 


be a great message to man\ind. He 
may be right. His tale is a wild one 
but it is consistent. And it embodies 
the only reasonable explanation I 
have ever seen for the presence of 
certain boo\s on the best-seller list. 
CMK] 



The cartoon above, by Ronald Searle, appeared in his collection “The Femtde Ap- 
proach," © 1954 by Ronald Searle. Mr. Searle appears regularly in "Punch.” 


Jusf a year ago, in his first story for F&SP ( Emily and the Bards Sub- 
lime), Robert F. Young introduced the problem of poetical androids, 
whose voice-tapes bear a lyric heritage to which a world no longer 
listens. It is, in Mr. Young’s tender treatment, an appealing subject 
well worth revisiting. 


Your Ghost Will Walk . . . 

by ROBERT F. YOUNG 


Betty lived for the moments she 
spent with Bob, and he, in turn, 
lived for the moments he spent with 
her. Naturally those moments were 
limited by their duties in the Wade 
household, but quite often those 
same duties brought them together, 
as, for instance, when Bob assisted in 
the preparation of the nightly out- 
door dinner. Their eyes would meet, 
then, over the sizzling tenderloins or 
pork chops or frankfurters, and Bob 
would say, "You’ll love me yet ! — 
and I can tarry your love’s pro- 
tracted growing — " and Betty would 
answer with one of her own lines: 
"say over again, and yet once over 
again, that thou dost love me . . 

Sometimes they would become so 
engrossed in each other that the ten- 
derloins or the chops or the frank- 
furters would be burned to a crisp — 
even on the microwave grill, which 
was supposed to be above such culi- 
nary atrocities. On such occasions 


Mr. Wade would become furious 
and threaten to have their tapes cut 
out. Being androids, they could not, 
of course, distinguish between basic 
motives and apparent motives, so 
they did not know that Mr. Wade’s 
threat stemmed from deeper frustra- 
tions than burnt tenderloins, chops, 
and frankfurters. But, androids or 
not, they were aware that without 
their tapes they would cease to be 
themselves for each other, and, sev- 
eral times, after Mr. Wade threat- 
ened them, they nearly ran away, 
and — once upon a time — they 
did ... 

Outdoor living was a cult in the 
Wade clan. None of them, from tall, 
exquisitely turned-out Mrs. Wade to 
little, dominating Dickie Wade, 
would have dreamed of eating din- 
ner indoors during the summer 
months, unless it was raining cats 
and dogs and pitchforks. Grilled 


38 

tenderloins were as much a part o£ 
their lives as the portable TV sets 
scattered on the disciplined sward, 
the two custom-built 2025 Cadillacs 
(Mr. Wade’s gold one and Mrs. 
Wade’s silver one), standing like ju- 
venile spaceships in the four-lane 
driveway, the huge, two-toned dou- 
ble garage, the king-size patio front- 
ing the one-acre ranch-style house, 
the outdoor swimming pool, and the 
pleasant vista of forested hills and 
dales tumbling away around them. 

Outdoor living, Mr. Wade was 
fond of remarking, built sturdy 
bodies and keen minds. He usually 
accompanied the remark by flexing 
his biceps and tensing his pectorals 
(he was mesomorphic and proud of 
the fact), and appended to it by pull- 
ing out his personal talking cigarette 
case (he manufactured them), de- 
pressing the little button that simul- 
taneously ejected a cigarette and ac- 
tivated the microscopic record con- 
taining his latest rhyme (he wrote 
his own), and listening appreciative- 
ly while he lit up : 

Light me up and smo\e me. 

Blow a ring or two, 

Vm a pleasure-packed diversion 
Created just for you I 

Ordinarily his verse had a sooth- 
ing effect oii him. Tonight, how- 
ever, the lines irritated him, left him 
vaguely dissatisfied. He recognized 
the symptoms : the cigarette case 
market was overdue for a new mas- 
terpiece, and it was up to him to 
compose it. 


FANTASY AND SCIENCE FICTION 

The day at the factory had been a 
tiring one, and he sat down in his 
Businessman’s Lounger (which had 
been moved out on the patio for the 
summer months) and let the auto- 
matic massage units go to work on 
him. He called to Betty to bring him 
an ice-cold beer. She was leaning 
across the microwave grill, talking 
to Bob, and he had to call twice be- 
fore she responded. Mr. Wade’s 
mood, which was already dark, grew 
darker yet. Even the ice-cold beer, 
when Betty finally brought it, failed 
to have its usual euphoric effect. 

He surveyed his domain, endeav- 
oring to revive his spirits by review- 
ing his possessions. There were his 
three small sons, squatting, hunched, 
and prone before their portable TV 
sets; there was his gold and gleam- 
ing Caddy waiting to take him 
wherever he wanted to go; there was 
his 39-21-39 wife reclining languor- 
ously in a nearby lawn chair, absorb- 
ing the last rays of the sun; there 
were his two rebuilt menials prepar- 
ing the evening meal over the micro- 
wave grill, reciting their anachro- 
nistic poetry to each other — 

Mr. Wade’s face darkened to a hue 
that matched his mood. If they 
burned the tenderloins again to- 
night . . . 

Abruptly he got up and sauntered 
over to the grilL He caught a frag- 
ment of verse as he came up — "/ 
shall never, in the years remaining, 
paint you pictures, no, nor carve you 
statues — ” Then Bob, who had been 
speaking, lapsed into silence. It was 


VOUR GHOST WILL WALK . . 


39 


always so. There was something 
about Mr, Wade’s presence that 
dampened their dialogue. But that 
was all right, he hastily reassured 
himself: he couldn’t endure their po- 
etry anyway. Nevertheless, he was 
piqued, and he did something he 
had never condescended to do be- 
fore: he came out with some of his 
own stuff — a poetic gem that dated 
back to his Early Years when he was 
still searching for his Muse — and 
threw it in their faces, so to speak: 

My heart’s on the highways, 

My hand’s at the wheel 
Of my brilliant (jtnd beautiful 
Automobile. 

They looked at him blankly. Mr. 
Wade knew, of course, that the 
blankness was no reflection on his 
art, that it was merely the result of 
his reference to an object outside the 
realm of their responses. Mrs. Wal- 
hurst, their original owner, had con- 
sidered it inappropriate to include 
automobiles in their memory banks, 
and when Mr. Wade had had them 
converted, he hadn’t bothered to 
have the deficiency corrected, not 
only because he hadn’t thought it 
necessary that a maid and a butler 
should be conversant with such phe- 
nomena, but because of the addi- 
tional expense it would entail. 

Just the same, his pique intensi- 
fied, turned into anger. “So maybe it 
isn’t immortal,” he said aggressively. 
“But it’s in tune with the times and 
it pays a tribute to a vital economic 
factor!” 


“Yes, Mr. Wade,” Betty said. 

“Certainly, Mr. Wade,” said Bob. 

“The trouble with you two,” Mr. 
Wade went on, “is your lack of re- 
spect for an economic system that 
guarantees the prosperity and the lei- 
sure necessary for the creation of art. 
It’s an artist’s duty to fulfill his obli- 
gations to the system that makes his 
art possible, and the best way he can 
do so is by helping to make that 
system permanent. Maybe no one 
will make an animated dummy out 
of me when I’m gone, but my talk- 
ing cigarette case line is one of the 
foundations on which Tomorrow 
will be built, an economic, practical 
foundation — not a bunch of silly 
words that no one wants to hear any 
more!” 

“Silly words ... Betty said 
tentatively. 

“Yes, silly words! The silly words 
you two whisper to each other every 
night when you’re supposed to be 
cooking dinner — ” 

Abruptly Mr. Wade paused and 
sniffed the air. Something was burn- 
ing. He didn’t have to look far to 
find out what it was. His anger 
leaped the fence .of his common 
sense, and he threw up his arms. “I 
will,” he shouted. “So help me I 
will! I’ll have your tapes cut out!” 
And he turned and strode furiously 
away. 

But he doubted if he ever would. 
If he did, he’d have to buy new tapes 
to replace the old ones, and tapes ran 
into money. Betty and Bob had cost 


40 

enough already without deliberately 
letting himself in for more expense! 

Still, he reconsidered, resuming his 
seat on the patio, they hadn’t cost 
anywhere near as much as a pair of 
made-to-order menials would have. 
So maybe they were a couple of ante- 
diluvian poets: they could — and did 
— do the work they’d been converted 
to do. And so maybe they did burn a 
tenderloin or two now and then and 
whisper nonsensical verse to each 
other whenever they got the chance: 
he was still getting away cheap. 

In a way, he’d started a trend. 
Everybody was buying up eccentric 
androids now and having them con- 
verted for practical tasks. But he’d 
been the first to see the possibilities. 
None of the other businessmen 
who’d attended the auction that en- 
sued Mrs. Walhurst’s death had rec- 
ognized the potentialities of a pair of 
androids like Betty and Bob. They’d 
all stood there on the unkempt lawn 
in front of Mrs. Walhurst’s crum- 
bling Victorian mansion, and when 
Betty and Bob had been led up on 
the auctioneer’s block, all any of 
them had done was laugh. Not that 
there hadn’t been sufficient justifica- 
tion for laughter. Imagine anyone, 
even a half-cracked old recluse like 
Mrs. Walhurst, having two poets 
built to order! It was a miracle that 
Androids, Inc. had even taken on 
the job, and Lord only knew how 
much they’d charged her. 

Mr. Wade had laughed too, but his 
reaction hadn’t stopped there. His 
mind had gone into action and he’d 


FANTASY AND SCIENCE FICTION 

taken a good look at the two poets. 
They’d been a couple of sad-looking 
specimens all right, with their long 
hair and period clothing. But just 
suppose, he had thought: Suppose 
you were to call them by their in- 
formal, instead of their formal, 
names, and suppose you were to get 
a good barber and a good hairdresser 
to go to work on their hair, and a 
good tailor and a good dressmaker 
to fit them out in modern clothing — 
or maybe even uniforms. And then 
suppose you were to get a good an- 
droid mechanic to convert them into, 
say, a — a — why yes, a maid and a 
butler! — the very maid and butler 
Mrs. Wade had wanted for so long. 
Why, with the money he’d save, he 
could easily buy the new auto-an- 
droid he'd wanted for so long, to 
service his and Mrs, Wade’s Caddies! 

Nobody had bid against him and 
he’d got them for a song. The cost 
of converting them had been a little 
more than he’d anticipated, but 
when you compared the over-all cost 
with what a brand new pair of meni- 
als would have set him back, the dif- 
ference was enormous. 

It was also gratifying. Mr. Wade 
began to feel better. He felt even bet- 
ter after consuming three medium- 
rare tender Joins (Betty and Bob had 
made haste to atone for the fiery fate 
of the first batch), a bowl of tossed 
salad, a basket of French fries, and 
another ice-cold beer, and he was his 
Normal Self again when he got up 
from the rustic backyard table for his 
nightly Walk Around. 


VOUR GHOST WILL WALK . . . 

It was fun walking over your own 
land, especially when you owned so 
much of it. The swimming pool was 
like a big silvery cigarette case in the 
light of the rising moon, and the 
portable TV sets bloomed on the 
lawn like gaudy chrysanthemums. 
The staccato sound of the cowboys 
shooting the Indians blended nicely 
with the distant hum of the traffic on 
highway 999. 

Mr. Wade’s footsteps gravitated, as 
they so often did of late, to the 
double-garage. Charley had the gold 
Caddy up on the hydraulic lift and 
was underneath it, giying it a grease 
job. Fascinated, Mr. Wade sat down 
to watch. 

Watching Charley was a pastime 
he never tired of. Charley had cost 
ten times as much as Betty and Bob, 
but he was worth every cent of it, 
from the visor of his blue service 
station attendant’s cap to the pol- 
ished tips of his oil-resistant shoes. 
And he just loved cars. You could 
see his love in the way he went about 
his work; you could see it in his 
I shining eyes, in his gentle, caressing 
hands. It was an inbuilt love, but it 
I was a true love just the same. When 
I Mr. Wade had set down his specifi- 
j cations, the man from Androids, 
j Inc., who had come around to take 
I the order, had objected, at first, to all 
the car-love Mr. Wade wanted put 
in. “We’re a bit diffident about in- 
stalling too much affection in them,” 
the man from Androids had said. 
“It’s detrimental to their stability.” 

“But don’t you see?” Mr. Wade 


41 

had said. “If he loves cars, and par- 
ticularly Caddies, he’s bound to do 
a better job servicing them. And not 
only that. I’ll keep his case in the 
garage and leave it open all the time 
and he’ll make a fine guard. Just let 
anybody try to steal my Caddy, eh?” 

“That’s precisely the point, Mr. 
Wade. You see, we wouldn’t want 
any of our products manhandling, 
or perhaps I should say — ha ha — 
‘android-handling’ a human, even if 
the human in question is a thief. It 
would be bad publicity for us.” 

“I should think it would be good 
publicity,” Mr. Wade had said. “Any- 
way,” he went on, in a sharper tone 
of voice, “if you expect to sell me an 
auto-android, he’s going to love my 
Caddy and that’s all there is to it!” 

“Ob, of course, sir. We’ll build you 
anything you like. It’s just that I felt 
duty-bound to point out that affec- 
tion is an unpredictable quality, even 
in humans, and — ” 

“Are you going to make him the 
way I want him or aren’t you!” 

“Yes, sir. Androids, Inc. has but 
one aim in life: Happy Customers. 
Now what else in the way of person- 
ality did you have in mind, sir ? ” 

“Well — ” Mr. Wade had cleared his 
throat. “First of all . . .” 

“Good evening, Mr. Wade,” Char- 
ley said, wiping off a fitting. 

“Good evening yourself,” Mr. 
Wade said. “How’s tricks?” 

“Not bad, sir. Not bad.” Charley 
applied the grease gun to the fitting, 
and pumped in precisely die right 
amount of grease. 


42 


FANTASY AND SCIENCE FICTION 


“Car in good shape, Charley?” 

“Well . . The synthetic tissue of 
Charley’s face was one of Android, 
Inc.’s latest triumphs. He could — 
and actually did — frown. “I hate to 
be critical, sir, but I don’t think you 
should take her on newly tarred 
roads. Her undercarriage is a sight!” 

“Couldn’t help it, Charley. You 
can get the stuff off, can’t you?” 

“In time, sir. In time. It’s not that 
I mind the work, of course. It’s the 
sacrilegious nature of the act itself 
that irks me. Couldn’t you have de- 
toured ? ” 

It was on the tip of Mr. Wade’s 
tongue to say that he could have, but 
that he hadn’t, and it was none of 
Charley’s G.D. business anyway. But 
he caught himself just in time. After 
all, wasn’t this the very reaction he 
had wanted in an auto-android? 
And didn’t it go to show that An- 
droids, Inc. had built Charley exactly 
according to specifications ? 

He said instead: “I’m sorry, Char- 
ley. I’ll be more considerate next 
time.” Then he got down to the real 
reason for his visit. “You like poetry, 
don’t you, Charley?” 

“I’ll say, sir. Especially yours!” 

A warm glow began in Mr. Wade’s 
toes, spread deliciously upward to 
the roots of his hair. “Been mulling 
over a new rhyme. Kind of like to 
get your reaction.” 

“Shoot, sir.” 

“Goes like this: 

Smo^e me early, smo^e me late, 

Smo]{e me if you’re underweight. 


I’m delightful and nutritious 

And decidedly delicious! 

“Why, that’s terrific, sir! You 
should really wow ’em with that 
one! Gee, Mr. Wade, you must be a 
genius to think up stuff like that.” 

“Well, hardly a genius — ” 

Charley wiped another fitting, ap- 
plied the gun. “Oh yes you are, sir!” 

“Well . . 

Mr. Wade left the garage on light 
footsteps. He never sang in the 
shower, but tonight he broke tradi- 
tion and gave his voice free rein. 
And all the while he sang, visions 
danced through his mind; visions of 
people everywhere, filing into drug- 
stores and smoke shops, saying, “I’d 
like a Wade Talking Cigarette Case, 
please”; visions of more and more 
orders pouring into the factory and 
the cigarette companies vying with 
each other for an exclusive option on 
the new rhyme, and the conveyor 
belts going faster and faster and the 
production-line girls moving like 
figures in a speeded-up movie — 

“Arthur!” 

Mr. Wade turned the shower inter- 
com dial to T. “Yes, dear?” 

“It’s Betty and Bob,” Mrs. Wade 
said. “I can’t find them anywhere!” 

“Did you look in the kitchen?” 

“I’m in the kitchen now and they 
aren’t here and the dishes are all 
stacked in the sink and the floor has- 
n’t been swept and~” 

“I’ll be right there,” Mr. Wade 
said. 


irOUR GHOST WILL WALK 


• • > 


43 


He toweled himself hurriedly and 
slipped into his shirt, shorts, and 
slippers, all the while telling himself 
what he’d tell them when he found 
them. He’d lay it right on the line 
this time: either they got on the ball 
and stayed there or he’d really have 
their tapes cut out! 

Abruptly he remembered that he’d 
already made the same threat quite a 
number of times, that he had, in fact, 
made it that very evening. Was it 
possible.? Could his threatening to 
have their tapes cut out have had 
anything to do with — 

But of course it couldn’t have! 
They were only androids. What 
could their tapes possibly mean to 
them.? 

Still- 

He joined Mrs. Wade in the 
kitchen and together they searched 
the house from front to back. The 
children had retired to their rooms 
with their 'TV sets some time earlier 
and, when questioned, said they’d 
seen nothing of Betty and Bob either. 
After the house, Mr. and Mrs. Wade 
searched the grounds, with the same 
result. Then they tried the garage, 
but there was no one there except 
Charley, who had just finished Mr. 
Wade’s Caddy and was starting in 
on Mrs. Wade’s. No, Charley said, 
running an appreciative hand along 
a silvery upswept tailfin, he’d seen 
nothing of them all evening. 

“If you ask me,” Mrs. Wade said, 
“they’ve nm away.” 

“Nonsense. Androids don’t run 
away.” 


“Oh yes they do. Lots of them. If 
you’d watch the newscasts once in a 
while instead of mooning all the 
time over what a great poet you are, 
you’d know about such things. Why, 
there was a case just the other day. 
One of those old models like yours, 
that some other cheapskate thought 
he could save money on, ran away. 
A mechanic named Kelly or Shelley 
or something.” 

“Weil, did they find him.?” 

“They found him all right. What 
was left of him. Can you imagine.? 
He tried to cross highway 656!” 

Compared to highway 999, high- 
way 656 was a sparsely traveled 
country road. Mr. Wade felt sick and 
his face showed it. He’d be in a fine 
fix if he had to replace Betty and 
Bob now, after putting up so much 
for Charley. He’d been a fool for not 
having had them completely con- 
verted in the first place. 

The distant hum of the traffic was 
no longer a pleasant background 
sound. There was an ominous qual- 
ity about it now. Abruptly Mr. Wade 
snapped into action. “Go call the po- 
lice,” he told his wife. “Tell them to 
get out here right away!” 

He turned and headed for his 
Caddy. On an afterthought, he 
called Charley. “Come along, Char- 
ley,” he said. “I might need your 
help.” They were nothing but a cou- 
ple of antique poets, but you never 
could tell. Charley’d be able to han- 
dle them all right, though; Charley 
could bend a crankshaft with his 
bare hands. 


44 

“Get in,” Mr. Wade said, and 
Charley slid into the seat beside him. 
Mr. Wade gunned the 750 h.p. motor 
and the Caddy shot down the drive, 
tires spinning. 

Charley winced. “Mr. Wade, 
please!” 

“Shut up!” Mr. Wade said. 

The drive wound around forested 
hills, dipped deep into night-damp 
dales. Moonlight was everywhere: on 
trees and grass and macadam, in the 
very air itself. But Mr. Wade was un- 
aware of it. His universe had shrunk 
to the length and breadth and height 
of the Caddy’s headlights. 

When his universe remained emp- 
ty, he began to think that perhaps 
they hadn’t come this way after all, 
that maybe they’d struck off through 
the surrounding countryside. Then, 
rounding the last curve, he saw the 
two familiar figures far down the 
drive. 

They were about a hundred yards 
from the highway, walking hand in 
hand, their shoulders touching. Mr. 
Wade swore. The fools, he thought. 
The ridiculous fools! Talking about 
the moon, probably, or some equally 
asinine subject, and walking serenely 
to their deaths! 

He slowed the Caddy when he 
came opposite them, and drove 
along beside them. If they saw the 
car, they gave no evidence of it. 
They were strolling dreamily, talk- 
ing now and then in low voices. Mr. 
Wade hardly recognized their faces. 

“Betty,” he called. “Bob! I’ve come 
to take you home.” 


FANTASY AND SCIENCE EiCTION 

They ignored him. Completely. 
Utterly. Furious, he stopped the car. 
Abruptly it occurred to him that he 
was acting like a fool, that they 
couldn’t possibly react to him as 
long as he remained in the Caddy, 
because automobiles, not being in- 
cluded in their memory banks, could 
have no reality for them. 

He got out his cigarette case, in- 
tending to light a cigarette and per- 
haps calm himself — 

Light me up and smo\e me. 

Blow a ring or two, 

I’m a pleasure-packed diversion . . 

Created just for you! 

For some reason the rhyme infuri- 
ated him all the more, and he 
jammed the cigarette case back in his 
pocket and got out and started 
around the car. In his eagerness to 
reach Betty and Bob, he skirted the 
left front fender too closely and the 
case, which had become wedged in 
the opening of his pocket, scraped 
screechingly along the enamel. 

Mr. Wade stopped in his tracks. 
Instinctively he wetted his finger 
and ran it over the long ragged scar. 
“Look Charley,” he wailed. “See 
what they made me do!” 

Charley had got out on the other 
side, had walked around the car, and 
was now standing in the moonlight a 
few paces away. There was a strange 
expression on his face. “I could kill 
them,” Mr. Wade went on. “I could 
kill them with my bare hands!” 

Betty and Bob were moving away 
from the car, still walking hand in 


VOUR GHOST WILL WALK . . . 

hand, still talking in low voices. Be- 
yond them the highway showed, a 
deadly river of hurtling lights. Bob’s 
voice drifted back : 

"Your ^host will wal\, you lover of 
trees, 

(If our loves remain) 

In an English lane, 

By a cornfield side a-flutter with 
poppies . . .” 

and suddenly Mr. Wade knew. 

He wondered why the answer 
hadn’t occurred to him before. It was 
so simple, and yet it solved every- 
thing. Betty and Bob would be 
completely destroyed and yet at the 
same time their usefulness in the 
Wade menage would be enhanced. 
Come to think of it, though, he’d 
subconsciously supplied half of the 
answer every time he’d threatened to 
have their tapes cut out. It was only 
the second half that had eluded him: 
replace those tapes with tapes con- 
taining his own poetry! 

Exhilaration flooded him. “All 
right, Charley,” he said. “Go get 
them. Go get the lousy outdated bas- 
tards! . . . Charley.?” 

Charley’s expression was more 
than merely strange now. It was 
frightening. And his eyes — “Char- 
ley!” Mr. Wade shouted. “I gave you 
an order. Obey it!” 

Charley said nothing. He took a 
tentative step toward Mr. Wade. An- 
other. For the first time Mr. Wade 
noticed the 12" crescent wrench in 
his hand. “Charley!” he screamed. 
“I’m your owner. Don’t you remem- 


. 45 

ber, Charley.? I’m your owner!” He 
tried to back away, felt his buttocks 
come up against the fender. Then he 
tried to slide along the fender, fren- 
ziedly holding up his arms to protect 
his face; but his arms were flesh and 
bone and the wrench was hardened 
steel, as were the sinews of the arm 
that wielded it, and it descended, not 
deviating an iota from the terrified 
target of Mr. Wade’s face, and he slid 
limply down the side of the fender 
to the macadam and lay there in the 
widening pool of his blood. 

Charley got the flashlight and the 
auto-first-aid kit out of the trunk 
and, kneeling by the fender, began 
to repaint the ragged wound. 

The road was a weird and wind- 
ing Wimpolc Street. They walked 
along it, hand in hand, lost in a 
world they’d never made, a world 
that liad no room for them, not even 
for their ghosts. 

And before them, in the alien 
night, the highway purred and 
throbbed. It waited . . . 

"How do I love thee — " Betty said. 

"The year’s at the spring — " said 
Bob. 

Making love, saly? 

The happier they! 

Draw yourself up from the light of 
the moon. 

And let them pass, as they will too 
soon. 

With the bean flower/ boon. 

And the blackbird's tune. 

And May, and fund . . . 


The pleasing notions of Novotny have ranged, in these pages, from a 
lake of pure bourbon to a lottery with Helen of Troy as prize; but the 
peculiar talent of Jesse Haimes may well be the most enviable idea 
that Novotny has yet conceived, f WARNING: / have gathered that 
there are a few readers who object to sex in fantasy. It seems only fair 
to warn these poor abstainers from the splendid source that they 
should immediately and rapidly skip to page 53.} 


0/4 Trick or Two 

JOHN NOVOTNY 

At nine that evening laura 
walked beautifully into the apart- 
ment. 

“Hello, Jesse,” she said softly. 
“For some reason I thought you 
had given up.” 

“You underestimate me, Laura,” 
he said, removing her coat. “And 
yourself. You never looked lovelier.” 

“Thank you, Jesse,” she smiled, 
accepting a glass of champagne. 
“I’ve never been in better shape. 
I’m ready to go ten rounds, if 
necessary.” 

“That was uncalled-for, darling,” 
lie said, hurt. “You make me sound 
crude. Perhaps in other days . . . 
but now I’m of a different mind.” 

“Fine,” Laura applauded, laugh- 
ing gayly. “Don’t tell me what role 
you’re playing tonight. It will be 
more fun if I have to guess.” 

Jesse had a wonderful dinner 
waiting and they ate by candelight. 


Later they sipped benedictine by the 
picture window overlooking the 
river. 

“You make it seem so worthwhile, 
Jesse,” Laura murmured. “There are 
moments when I almost feel like 
giving the devil his due.” 

“That’s what I’m planning on,” 
Jesse said casually. 

“Oh.?” Laura answered question- 
ingly. “You expect me to succumb, 
to offer myself to you, out of the 
goodness of my heart.?” 

“Or the badness,” Jesse added. 

“I wish you luck.” 

“Thank you,” Jesse said. “Then 
you agree that should you stand 
before me unclothed, I might as- 
sume, rightfully, that I have won 
the game.?” 

“Unclothed — ^by force?” 

“No, my dear. No force,” he 
smiled. 

“I agree that under those circum- 


46 


A TRICK OR TWO 


47 


stances you’d have a pretty good 
assumption,” Laura said. “When do 
you expect me to go into this dis- 
robing act.?” 

“Most anytime,” Jesse said. “To 
hasten your decision, let me show 
you a few little presents I have for 
you.” 

Jesse kept himself from hurrying 
as he led her to the two closet doors. 
He opened one and pointed to the 
furs hanging inside. 

“My choice.?” Laura asked. 

“All of them,” Jesse said. “Look 
them over.” 

She stepped inside the cbset and 
Jesse smiled. His mind raced over 
the events of the past week. 

Jesse Haimes sipped his Scotch 
pensively, then placed the glass 
decisively on the table and leaned 
toward his friend. 

“Mind you, Tom,” he said, “it 
isn’t that I haven’t tried. Lord 
knows. I’ve played the gentleman, 
the brother, and the man-of-the- 
world. I’ve been patient, impatient, 
persuasive.” 

“Generous?” Tom inquired. 

“Abundantly,” Jesse insisted, “I 
even bought her a poodle.” 

“And through it all,” Tom Casey 
smiled, “Miss Laura Carson remains 
unconquered, unsullied, unbowed.” 

“Disgustingly so,” Jesse admitted. 

“Let’s have another drink,” Tom 
suggested, signaling the waiter. “Or 
do you have a conference this 
afternoon?” 

“Nothing,” Jesse said. “A few 


letters to get out and some desks 
must be moved. We’re changing the 
accounting room to the Forty-eighth 
Street side.” 

“Dry work,” Tom Casey said. 
“Another scotch is definitely in 
order.” 

They sat back, waiting for the 
drinks, and pondered the enigma of 
Miss Laura Carson. Tom watched 
Jesse light a cigarette. As Jesse 
brought his hand down to drop the 
match in the ash tray, Tom reached 
forward and snapped his fingers. 

“Abra-ca-dabra,” he said. The ash 
tray vanished. Jesse’s hand froze and 
he stared at the spot where the glass 
container had rested. Finally he 
smiled foolishly. 

“Well done, Tom,” he said. “How 
did you do it?” 

“Magic,” Tom said, self-con- 
sciously. “I don’t usually fool 
around in public, but I just had 
the urge.” 

“I didn’t know that was your 
hobby.” 

“It’s not,” Tom laughed. “That’s 
my trick. Nothing else.” 

“Bring it back,” Jesse said. 

“I can’t,” Tom confessed. “I can 
make small items disappear. Where 
they go, I have no idea.” 

Jesse stopped smiling and began 
to frown. He restrained himself as 
the waiter approached and served 
the drinks. He watched the man 
walk away; then he turned hur- 
riedly back to Tom Casey. 

“Are you trying to tell me that 
this business is on the level?” he 


48 

demanded, gesturing aimlessly at 
the center of the table. Tom nodded 
foolishly. 

“I don’t believe it,” Jesse said. 
“After all . . . come now, Tom.” 

“Put your swizzle stick out there,” 
Tom said. 

Jesse slowly pushed the plastic 
stirring rod to the spot indicated. 
Tom snapped his fingers at the 
stick. 

“Abra-ca-dabra,” he said. The ob- 
ject disappeared. 

“Good Lord,” Jesse breathed, 
“And to think I doubted Dun- 
ninger.” 

The two men sat silently until 
Jesse called the waiter. 

“Two more scotches,” he ordered, 
“and an ash tray.” 

The waiter brought the drinks 
and the ash tray, surveyed the table 
and its occupants suspiciously, and 
departed. 

“Can you teach me.?” Jesse asked. 

“I don’t think so,” Tom ex- 
plained. “An old proofreader out in 
Denver told me about it. Everybody 
has one trick he can do. The proof- 
reader could change water into 
whisky. That was his trick and a 
very handy one.” 

“Do you mean I have some bit 
of magic I can do.?” Jesse asked 
excitedly. 

“Everyone has,” Tom said. “Mine 
you just saw.” 

“How does a person find out his 
trick — if that’s what you call it.?” 

Tom shrugged. 

“Most people never do, I guess,” 


FANTASY AND SCIENCE FICTION 

he said. “I just stumbled on mine.” 

“Maybe mine is the same as 
yours,” Jesse suggested. 

“Try it,” Tom said, isolating the 
ash tray. Jesse replaced it with a 
swizzle stick. 

“The waiter would raise hell 
about another ash tray,” he ex- 
plained. He took a deep breath, 
snapped his fingers, and intoned 
the necessary phrase. The stirrer 
remained. 

“Did I do something wrong?” 
Jesse asked hopefully. Tom shook 
his head. 

“Perfect technique,” he said. 
“Negative result.” 

“I guess I have a different talent,” 
Jesse murmured. “Damn it! How 
am I going to find out what it is.?” 

“It’s not that important,” Tom 
Casey said. “Unless it’s the water 
and whisky deal, of course.” 

The waiter was summoned again 
and soon Jesse was glaring bale- 
fully at a glass of water. 

“No luck,” Tom said. “I wouldn’t 
worry about it. As I said, I hardly 
ever use mine. It’s embarrassing 
when people ask questions. I can’t 
explain the trick, so I automatically 
am classified as a stinker or a 
drunken bum. I’d just forget about 
it if I were you.” 

Jesse shook his head. The two 
men finished their drinks and left 
the restaurant. As they parted at 
Madison and 49th, Jesse smiled at 
his companion, 

“First time in weeks I’ve been 
able to think about something other 


A TRICK OR TWO 


49 


than Laura Carson,” he said. “See 
you next week.” 

“These letters, Mr. Haimes — ” 

Jesse smiled at the slim brunette. 

“Yes, Carol?” 

“They’re ready for your signa- 
ture. And Mr. Wigmann would like 
to have two more cabinets in Ac- 
counts Payable.” 

“Fine,” Jesse said, accepting the 
papers. “Tell Wiggy he’ll have his 
cabinets in a few days.” 

He watched his secretary walk to 
her desk in the far corner of the 
large, tastefully decorated office they 
shared. After the girl settled at the 
desk and was busy calling Wig- 
mann’s secretary, Jesse drew his 
hand out from under his own desk. 
He looked down expectantly at the 
hat he held. 

“Abra-ca-dabra,” he muttered. No 
rabbit materialized. 

“Thank God,” he whispered. “I 
wasn’t particularly anxious to have 
that ability.” 

Carol finished her call and came 
across the office. 

“Yes, Carol?” 

“Mr. Wigmann requests that if the 
cabinets are among tbe surplus items 
in the next room, could he look at 
them, in order to plan where they 
will be placed.” 

“Tell him to come over in five 
minutes. We may have to move a 
few things.” 

The girl returned to the phone 
and then joined Jesse as he unlocked 
the door to the small office next to 


his. It had been pressed into use as 
a storage area during the reorgan- 
ization period and was filled with 
varied pieces of office equipment. 
Jesse pointed. 

“As I suspected,” he said. “Damn! 
All the way in the back. I’ll push 
these desks aside if you’ll move the 
lamps and chairs.” 

After a few moments of coopera- 
tive endeavor Carol and Jesse 
Haimes stood before the two cabi- 
nets. Each was two and a half feet 
wide by seven feet tall. The cabinets 
had no shelves and were intended 
to hold clothing. Jesse opened one 
of the metal doors and looked in- 
side. 

“Wiggy will have to arrange for 
shelves,” he said, closing the door. 
“He can call Griswold and — ” 

Jesse stopped and looked at the 
cabinet. Dimly he recalled a vaude- 
ville act he had once enjoyed. 

“Carol,” he said, hesitantly. 
“Would you — well, this may seem 
odd-” 

“Yes, Mr. Haimes?” 

Jesse decided that wording was 
less important than results. 

“Would you mind stepping into 
this cabinet for one moment?” 

Carol smiled. 

“Into the — cabinet?” 

“Yes. Into the cabinet.” 

“I don’t understand.” 

“In all probability,” Jesse said, 
“there will be nothing to under- 
stand. If there is I will explain la- 
ter.” 

“I hope so,” Carol said, still smil- 


50 

ing. She lifted the hem of her skirt 
slightly and stepped up into the 
locker-like affair. 

“Thank you,” Jesse said. He 
closed the door and stepped back. 
With squared shoulders he faced the 
cabinet. 

“Abra-ca-dabra,” he said, softly 
enough so that Carol couldn’t hear. 
He opened the cabinet and smiled 
in assuringly. Jesse swallowed hard 
as he looked at the empty space. Hur- 
riedly he leaped to the remaining 
cabinet and opened the door. 

“Don’t be alarmed, Car — Oh, 
Lord!” 

Carol stood framed in the cabinet. 
She was nude and she was angry. 
Jesse looked away and then, decid- 
ing the hell with it, he looked back. 

“What have you done with your 
clothes .? ” he asked. 

“What have / done?” Carol said, 
ominously. She pushed one bare foot 
forward, then pointed to her neck. 
“From pumps to my black choker 
ribbon. Whsst. You’ve never been 
better.” 

She stepped carelessly from the 
cabinet and sank into one of the 
surplus swivel chairs. 

“You said you’d explain,” she said. 
“This had better be good. Your 
apartment is one thing, the office is 
entirely different. I’ve always in- 
sisted — ” 

She stopped and looked at the 
cabinet she had just vacated. 

“That’s not the one I — Oh broth- 
er, you better start talking. I think 
I’ll scream.” 


FANTASY AND SCIENCE FICTION 

She opened her mouth and Jesse 
leaped forward to cover it with his 
hand. 

“I can explain!” he said quickly. 
Carol relaxed and Jesse took his 
hand away. 

“OK,” she said. “Explain,” 

Jesse looked at the two cabinets 
and then back at Carol. 

“I can’t,” he said unhappily. Carol 
opened her mouth wide. 

“Wait!” Jesse pleaded. “I mean I 
don’t know how it happened. Pass- 
ing you from one cabinet to another 
just happens to be my trick.” 

“Oh,” Carol said, raising her eye- 
brows. “Your trick, eh? Do you 
mind if your naked little secretary 
says you certainly have a fine collec- 
tion. And may I ask what you in- 
tend to do right now?” 

She swiveled in the chair and 
made a complete circle. 

“Not very much room in here,” 
she said tersely. 

“Carol, I—” 

“Apartments are apartments. Of- 
fices are offices. And I don’t care for 
that trick. If you — ” 

"Mr. Haimes. Mr. Haimes." 

They both leaped up as Mr. Wig- 
mann’s voice floated in from Jesse’s 
office. 

“Wait there!” Jesse shouted. 

“Oh, I can come in and — ” 

“No,” Jesse shouted frantically. 
“Just wait a moment. Until I get 
things — straightened out.” 

“Very well,” Wiggy answered. 
They could hear his steps as he 
wandered about the office. 


A TRICK OR TWO 


51 


“Get in the cabinet,” Jesse whis- 
pered to Carol. 

“Like hell,” Carol whispered, 
“Never again.” 

“Carol,” Jesse pleaded. He leaned 
down and kissed her full on the lips. 
“Ten dollars a week raise. The Win- 
ter Garden and the Stork Club one 
evening next week. A new gown.” 

Carol melted. 

“Mr. Haimes. That isn’t neces- 
sary.” 

“It certainly is,” he said. “I’ve done 
you an injustice. Offices are offices. 
I promise to remember.” 

She threw both bare arms around 
his neck and kissed him. Drawing 
away, she smiled, “Into the cabinet.” 
As she stepped in, Jesse permitted 
himself one light pat on Carol’s pert 
rump and closed the door. 

“Wiggy,” he called. “Now you can 
come in. I’ve finally located them.” 

Mr. Wigmann walked into the 
smaller room and approached the 
cabinets. 

“Excellent, perfect,” he said. 
“Good of you, Haimes, to go to 
the trouble. Heavens, you’re perspir- 
ing something fierce. I assure you I 
could have waited.” 

“Not at all,” Jesse assured him, 
leading him away. 

“But the insides — ” 

“Nothing. Bare,” Jesse coughed 
on the last word. “You’ll have to 
arrange for shelves. See Griswold.” 

He ushered Wiggy to the door, 
shook hands, and propelled the little 
man into the hall. Jesse then went 
to the phone and dialed. 


“Miss Devins.? Jesse Haimes,” he 
announced. “No, don’t call B. J. I 
want to speak to you. I have a favor 
to ask. My club is putting on a show 
and we’re missing one outfit — a 
girl’s. I’d have asked Carol but she 
is out on business at the moment. — 
You will? Fine. — Size? — Oh, about 
Carol’s size. One each of the follow- 
ing; dress . . .” 

A little later he returned to the 
small office and released Carol. 

“Don’t worry about your clothes,” 
he said. “I’ve sent down for a com- 
plete new outfit.” 

“Who?” 

“B. J.’s secretary. Miss Devins,” he 
told her. 

“Good,” Carol smiled. “She has 
excellent taste and is very conscien- 
tious. She’ll take at least an hour.” 

Hand in hand they returned to 
Jesse’s office. 

Three days later he completed the 
construction work in his apartment. 
The two cabinets were built in flush 
with the wall and looked like noth- 
ing else than closet doors. Jesse put 
his tools away and prepared the final 
test. He took the small kewpie doll 
and placed it on the floor of closet 
number one. Carefully he patted the 
lace dress in place and rearranged 
the tiny cap. Finally he stood up, 
closed the door, and backed off. 

“Abra-ca-dabra,” he said, waving 
a few fingers negligently. He strode 
to cabinet number two, opened the 
door, and smiled as he picked up 
the shiny little plastic body. 


52 

“Excellent,” he murmured. “Now 
to call Miss Laura Carson.” 

Jesse silently closed the cabinet 
door behind Laura as she hummed 
through the furs. Quickly he stepped 
back and raised his arm. 

“Abra-ca-dabra,” he sang. 

The room was quiet except for 
the soft music Jesse had playing in the 
background. He walked to cabinet 
two and opened the door. Laura 
stood there and Jesse drew a deep 
breath even tliough he was prepared. 
She smiled, unflustered and com- 
pletely calm, as she stepped from the 
cabinet. Her body was flawless, per- 
fect, warm and soft. Graceful move- 
ments shadowed ivory-tan skin as 
she walked in the soft hghts. Her 
dark hair was long and lay tan- 
talizingly on exquisite shoulders. 
Jesse was forced to lock his hands 
behind his back. Laura walked half- 
way across the room, then turned 
and looked at the two doors. 

“You’re naked,” Jesse said hoarse- 
ly. Laura looked down at herself. 

“Never more so,” she laughed. As 
her body moved in laughter Jesse 


FANTASY AND SCIENCE FICTION 

was forced to remove his tie. Laura 
walked to the big window where 
moonlight crept across her body. 
Jesse removed his shirt. 

“You seem very much at ease,” he 
remarked. “No surprise.?” 

Laura shook her head as he con- 
tinued undressing. 

“It’s quite obvious that you have 
discovered your trick,” she said. 

For a moment Jesse stopped, bal- 
ancing on one leg. 

“Even so,” he said, determined 
not to lose the advantage, “the cir- 
cumstances have worked out.” 

“That’s true,” Laura said, “but 
please do me a favor.” 

“Yes.?” 

“Will you hold that fire iron out 
at arm’s length?” 

Jesse walked wonderingly to the 
fireplace, picked up the poker, and 
held it out. Laura raised a long slen- 
der forefinger and pointed at the 
brass tool; and in Jesse’s hand the 
poker became pliable, soft, and wilt- 
ed like wax before a flame. He 
stared at it in horror. 

“Jesse,” Laura said. “I discovered 
my trick long ago.” 


The Unfortunate TopologiSl 

A burleycue dancer, a pip 
Named Virginia, could peel in a zip; 
But she read science fiction 
And died of constriction 
Attempting a Mdbius strip. 


S. D. GOTTESMAN 


Those who skipped the Novotny story because it contained sex may 
safely resume their reading here, even though Mr. Anderson’s narrative 
is, as its title indicates, primarily concerned with nothing else. For it is 
surely a corollary to Comstock’s First Law ("the censorability of 
mammae varies in inverse ratio to the amount of melanin in the 
skin”) that the obscenity of the sexual processes of any race varies in 
direct ratio to the kinship of that race with the race judging; and An- 
derson’s wholly alien Mercurians are much too silicious to be salacious. 
But their sex-life, if unalluring, offers a mystery upon the solution to 
which depend the lives of two Earthmen — and possibly the future 
of Earth. 


Life Cycle 

hy POUL ANDERSON 


“Well, all right! I’ll go to their 
damned temple myself!” 

“You must be crazy even to think 
of such a tonteria,” said Juan Navar- 
ro. He sucked hard on his pipe, de- 
cided it was finished, and knocked 
out the dottle. “They would tear you 
in pieces.” 

“Quicker than starving to death 
on this hellhound lump of rock.” 

“Very small pieces.” Navarro. sat 
down on a workbench and swung 
his legs. He was a Basque, medium- 
sized, longheaded, dark-haired, 
with the mountaineer’s bony inde- 
pendence in his face. He was also a 
biologist of distinction, an amateur 
violinist, and a hungry man waiting 
to die. “You don’t understand, Joe. 


Those Dayside beings are not just 
another race. They are gods.” 

Joe Kingsbury Thayendanegea, 
who was a stocky Mohawk from 
upper New York State, paced the 
caging space of the room, hands be- 
hind his back, and swore. If he had 
had a tail, he would have lashed it. 
He was the pilot and engineer, the 
only other Terrestrial on Mercury. 
When you dove this far down into 
the sun’s monstrous gravitational 
well, you couldn’t take a big crew 
along. 

“So what else can you think of?” 
he challenged. “Shall we draw 
straws and barbecue the loser?” 

Antella, the owl-faced Martian 
mineralogist, made a harsh cawing 


54 

in his gray-feathered throat. “Best it 
be me,” he advised. “Then no one is 
technically guilty of cannibalism.” 

“Not much meat on that skinny 
little frame of yours, amigo," said 
Navarro. “And a human body 
would have so many other uses after 
one was finished with the organic 
parts. Make the vertebrae into chess- 
men — the ribs into Venetian blinds 
for bay windows — yes, and the skulls 
would make distinctive mousetraps.” 

Kingsbury shook heavy shoulders 
and thrust his beaky face forward. 
“What are we yattering about?” he 
demanded. “We’ve got a week’s slim 
rations left aboard this clunk. After 
that we start starving.” 

“So you are going to the temple 
and confront the gods and convince 
them of the error of their ways. Ka!” 
Antella clicked his short, curved bill. 
“Or did you think to threaten them 
with our one solitary pistol?” 

“I’m going to try and find out 
what the Twonks — or their gods, if 
you insist — have against us,” said 
Kingsbury. “Here’s the idea; it’s get- 
ting close to sunrise time, and there’ll 
be a crowd of ’em at the temple. I’ll 
go out on Dayside and find me an 
empty Twonk shell and get into it. 
With luck, I’ll pass unnoticed long 
enough to — ” 

Antella’s brass-colored eyes wid- 
ened. “The scheme is a bold one,” he 
admitted. “As far as I know, there 
is strict silence during the ceremo- 
nies, whatever they are. You just 
might accomplish it.” 

Navarro leered. “I know exactly 


FANTASY AND SCIENCE FICTION 

what you would accomplish, Joe. Do 
you remember that story you tell me, 
oh, last year I think it was? About 
the tourist in the North forest, and 
the Canuck guide, and the moose 
call?” 

“Yeah. ‘Ze moose, she — ’ Hey! 
What do you mean?” 

“Precisely. That temple is a breed- 
ing place. They go there to breed.” 

“How do you know? I’ve been 
tramping around arguing with the 
damn Twonks, and you’ve just sat 
here in the lab.” 

Navarro shrugged. “What else 
could I do but my research? I stud- 
ied the biochemistry of Mercurian 
life. I worked out the life cycle of a 
few plants and one insectoidal 
form.” 

“They all look like insects. But go 
on.” 

“The first expedition established 
no more than that Mercurian life has 
a silicate base,” recapitulated Navar- 
ro. “Otherwise they were too busy 
staying alive and teaching English to 
the natives and making maps. But 
they brought home specimens, which 
were analyzed. And one strange fact 
became evident: those specimens 
could not reproduce under Twilight 
Zone conditions. Yet they live herd 
And we see the natives lay eggs, 
which hatch; and lower forms bring 
forth their own kind in various 
ways — ” 

“I know,” grunted Kingsbury. 
“But why? I mean, what’s so puz- 
zling about their reproduction?” 

“The cells are totally different, 


LIFE CYCLE 


55 


both physically and chemically, from 
protoplasmic life,” said Navarro. 
“But there are analogues; there have 
to be. The basic process is the same, 
meiosis and mitosis, governed by a 
molecular ‘blueprint’ not unlike our 
chromosomes. However, though we 
know that such processes must take 
place, the silicate materials involved 
are too stable to undergo them. The 
ordinary exothermic reactions which 
fuel Mercurian hfe do not produce 
enough energy for the cell-duplica- 
tion which is growth. In fact, adult 
Mercurians are even incapable of 
self-repair; wounds do not heal, they 
must depend on being so tough that 
in this low gravity they suffer few 
injuries.” 

“So what happens?” 

Navarro shrugged. “I do not 
know, except this much: that some- 
how, at breeding time, they must 
pick up an extra charge of energy. 
Analyzing small animals, I have 
identified the compound which is 
formed to store this energy and re- 
lease it, by gradually breaking 
down, as the organism grows. It is 
all used up at maturity. But where 
is the temperature necessary to build 
up this molecule? Only on Dayside. 

“Now these gods are said to live 
on Dayside and meet the Twonks of 
Twilight at the temple. You know 
the breeding ceremonies take place 
when hbration has brought the tem- 
ple into the sunlight.” 

“Go on,” said Antella thought- 
fully. 

“Pues, one of the plants has this 


life cycle: it grows in the Twilight 
Zone, on the sunward side, and its 
vines are phototropic. Eventually 
their growth and the libration bring 
them into the light. The spore-pods 
burst and the spores are scattered 
into the air. A few are blown back 
into Twilight, and they are now 
fertile; radiation has formed the nec- 
essary compound. Or consider one 
of the small insectoids I studied. It 
breeds here in the usual manner, 
then the female crawls out into the 
light to lay her eggs. When they 
hatch, the little ones scurry back to 
the shade, and some of them reach 
shelter before they fry. Wasteful, of 
course, but even on this barren plan- 
et nature is a notorious spendthrift.” 

“Wait a minute!” interrupted 
Kingsbury. Navarro liked to hear 
himself talk, but there are limits. 
“Are you implying that the Dayside 
gods are merely the sun? That be- 
cause the Twonks have to have light 
when they breed, they’ve built up a 
sort of Apollo-cum-fertility cult?” 

“Why not? There are races on 
Earth and Mars with similar beliefs. 
To this day, here and there in my 
own Pyrenees, many women believe 
the wind can make them pregnant.” 
Navarro laughed. “It is a good ex- 
cuse anyhow, no?” 

“But damn it, there’s Dayside life 
too. Life that never comes into Twi- 
light.” 

“Yes, yes, of course. Quite differ- 
ent from Twilight biology — after all, 
it has to live at a temperature of four 
hundred degrees Centigrade. Possi- 


56 

bly the Twonks regard some Day- 
side animal as a sort of fertility 
totem. I am only saying this: that if 
the gods are actually the sun, you 
will have Satan’s own time persuad- 
ing the sun to take back its edict 
that we must die.” 

In the end, there was a decision. 
Navarro thought Kingsbury a sui- 
cidal idiot . . . but what choice was 
there They would go to the temple 
together, disguised, and find out 
what they could; if there were no 
gods, but only some fanatically con- 
servative priestess behind the death 
sentence, a .20-caliber Magnum auto- 
matic might make her see reason. 
Amelia would stay behind to guard 
the ship; he couldn’t take heat as 
well as an Earthling. 

The humans donned their space- 
suits and went through the airlock. 
Navarro had the gun, Kingsbury 
armed himself with a crowbar; at 
last and worst, he thought savagely, 
he’d crack a few Mercurian cara- 
paces. 

They stepped out into desolation. 
Behind them lay the Explorer, a 
crippled metal giant, no more to 
them than a shelter. In the end, per- 
haps, a coffin. There was no possi- 
bility of rescue from Earth — radio 
communication was out, with the 
sun so close, and Mercury Expedi- 
tion Two wasn’t due back for six 
months. Earth wouldn’t even realize 
they were in trouble till they had 
already died. 

To right and left, the dry valley 


FANTASY AND SCIENCE FICTION 

lifted into gaunt ocherous peaks, 
against a dusky sky where a few 
hard stars glittered. There were 
bushes scattered about, low things 
with blue metallic-looking leaves. A 
small animal bounded from them, 
its shell agleam in the wan light. 
The ground was slaty rubble, flaked 
off in departed ages when Mercury 
Still had weather. Above the peaks to 
the left hung a white glare, the in- 
visible sun. It would never be seen 
from here, but a few miles further 
west the planet’s libration would 
lift it briefly and unendurably over 
the near horizon. 

There was a wind blorving; the 
wind is never quiet on Mercury, 
where one side is hot enough to melt 
lead and the other close to absolute 
zero. It sent a ghostly whirl of dust- 
devils across the valley. There 
wasn’t much air: a man would have 
called it a soft vacuum, and not fit 
to breathe at any density. Most of it 
had long ago escaped into space or 
frozen on Darkside, but now vapor 
pressure had struck a balance and 
there was some carbon dioxide, nitro- 
gen, ammonia, and inert gas free. 
Enough to blow fine dust up against 
the weak gravity, and to form an 
ionosphere which made radio com- 
munication possible over the 
horizon. 

Kingsbury shuddered, remember- 
ing green forests and clear streams 
under the lordly sky of Earth. What 
the devil had inspired him to come 
here? Money, he supposed. Earth 
needed fissionable ores and Mercury 


life cycle 


57 


had them, and Expedition Two was 
sent to negotiate an agreement with 
the natives. The pay was propor- 
tional to the risk . . . but what use 
is all the money in the cosmos to a 
dead man? 

“When I get home,” said Navarro 
wistfully, “after the parades and ban- 
quets — yes, surely there will be par- 
ades, with all the pretty girls throw- 
ing flowers and kisses at us — after 
that I shall retire to my own village 
and sit down before the tavern and 
order a bottle of the best Amontil- 
lado. Three days later I will ask 
them to sweep the cobwebs off me. 
A week later I shall go home and 
sleep.” 

“I’ll settle for a tall cold beer in 
Gavagan’s,” said Kingsbury. “You 
ought to let me take you pubcrawl- 
ing in New York sometime — Bah!” 
His gauntleted hand made a vicious 
gesture at the tumbled ruin of a 
landscape. “What makes you think 
we ever will get home?” 

“Nothing,” said Navarro gently, 
“except that I will not permit my- 
self to think otherwise.” 

They rounded a tall red crag and 
saw how the valley broadened into 
cultivated fields, ironberry bushes 
and flintgrain stalks. On the dusky 
edge of vision was the Mercurian 
hive, a giant dome of crushed rock 
in which several thousand natives 
dwelt. There were hundreds of such 
barracks, scattered around the Twi- 
light Zone, with a temple for every 
dozen or so. Apparently there was 
no variation in language or culture 


over the whole planet — understand- 
able when the habitable area was so 
small. And it was an open question 
how much individual personality a 
Mercurian had, and how much of 
her belonged to the hive-mind. 

Close at hand was the hut which 
held their lives. It was a crude, roof- 
less structure, four stone walls and 
an open doorway. The first expedi- 
tion had erected it with native help, 
to store supplies and tools — it made 
the ship roomier. The Explorer’s 
crew had used it similarly, putting 
in most of their food and the bulky 
ion<ontrol rings from the reaction 
drive. Again the natives had lent a 
willing hand. 

There were four guards outside 
the hut. They were armed only with 
spears and clubs. It would be easy 
enough to shoot them down. But 
before anything could be transferred 
back to the ship, the entire hive 
would come swarming, and there 
weren’t that many bullets. 

“Let’s go talk to them,” said Na- 
varro. 

“What’s the use?” asked Kings- 
bury. “I’ve talked to those animated 
hulks till my larynx needs a re- 
tread.” 

“I have an idea — I want to check 
on it.” Navarro’s clumsy suit went 
skimming over the ashen ground. 
Kingsbury followed with a mum- 
bled oath. 

The nearest guard hefted her spear 
and swiveled antennae in their direc- 
tion. Otherwise there was no move- 
ment in her. She stood six feet tall. 


58 


FANTASY AND SCIENCE FICTION 


broad as a spacesuited man, her exo- 
skeleton shimmering blue, her head 
featureless except for the glassy eyes. 
With four three-fingered arms, tight- 
ly curled ovipositor, and sliding 
joints of armor, she looked like a 
nightmare insect. But she wasn’t; 
a dragonfly or a beetle was man’s 
brother beside this creature of sili- 
cone cells and silicate blood and 
shell of beryllium alloy. Kingsbury 
thought of her as a kind of robot — 
well, yes, she was alive, but where 
did you draw the line between the 
robot and the animal ? 

Navarro stopped before her. She 
waited. None of her sisters moved. 
It was a disconcerting habit, never 
to open conversation. 

The Basque cleared his throat. “I 
have come — oh, hell.” With his teeth 
he switched his helmet radio to the 
band the natives could sense. “I wish 
to ask again why you deny us per- 
mission to use our own food.” 

The answer crackled in their ear- 
phones. “It is the command of the 
gods.” 

Kingsbury stood listening to that 
nonhuman accent and speculating 
just what sort of religion these en- 
tities did have. They had emotions — 
they must, being alive — ^but the de- 
gree of correspondence to human or 
Martian feeling was doubtful. 

It wasn’t strange that they com- 
municated by organically generated 
FM radio pulses. The atmosphere 
didn’t carry enough sound to make 
ears worthwhile. But constant sub- 
mergence in the thoughts of every 


other Mercurian within ten miles 
... it must do something to the 
personality. Make the society as a 
whole more intelligent, perhaps— 
the natives had readily learned Eng- 
lish from the first expedition, while 
men hadn’t yet made sense out of the 
native language. But there was prob- 
ably little individual awareness. A 
sort of ant mind: ants collectively 
did remarkable things but were hope- 
less when alone. 

Navarro smiled, a meaningless au- 
tomatic grimace behind his face- 
plate. “Can you not tell me why the 
gods have so decreed.? You were all 
friendly enough when my race last 
visited you. What made the gods 
change their minds?” 

No answer. That probably meant 
the Twonk didn’t know either. 

“You could at least let us have 
back our control rings and enough 
food for the journey home. I assure 
you, we would leave at once.” 

“No.” The voice was alike empty 
of rancor and mercy. “It is required 
that you die. The next strangers to 
come will, then, not be forewarned 
and we can dispose of them too. 
This land will be shunned.” 

“If we get desperate enough, we 
will start fighting you. We will kill 
many.” 

“That I — we do not understand. 
We are letting you die this way 
because it is easiest. If you fight us, 
then we shall fight you, and over- 
whelm you with numbers; so why 
do you not die without making use- 
less trouble for yourselves?” 


Lira CYCLE 


“That isn’t in our nature.” 

“I — we do not know what you 
mean by ‘nature.’ Every She, when 
she has laid as many eggs as she can, 
goes out to the sun and returns to 
those which you name gods. Death 
is a correct termination when there 
is no further use for the organism.” 

“Men think differently,” said Na- 
varro. “Of course, as a more or less 
good Catholic, I consider my body 
only a husk . . . but I still want to 
keep it as long as possible.” 

No reply, except for some crack- 
ling gibberish. The Mercurians were 
talking to each other. Weaker over- 
tones made Kingsbury suspect that 
several Twonks within the hive were 
joining the discussion — or the stream 
of consciousness, or whatever you 
wanted to call the rumination of a 
semi-collective mind. 

“Look here, my friend,” said Na- 
varro. “You know our purposes. We 
want to get certain minerals from 
you. You have no use for them, and 
we would pay you well, in tools and 
machinery you cannot make for 
yourselves.” 

“It would be mutually advantage- 
ous,” agreed the Twonk. “When 
the first ship came, we considered it 
an excellent idea. But since then the 
gods have told us your sort must not 
be allowed to live,” 

‘Tor Dios! Why?” 

“The gods did not say.” 

“You serve these gods,” said Na- 
varro harshly. “I believe you give 
them food . . . right? And tools and 
anything else they want. You obey 


59 

their least whim. What do you gain 
from them?” 

No answer, 

“Can we talk to these gods? May- 
be we can persuade them — ” 

“It is forbidden you to see the 
Living Light.” Another conference. 
“Perhaps you will agree to die and 
stop bothering us if we tell you the 
gods are needful to our life. They 
give us pure metal — ” 

“Most of which you make into 
tools for them,” snapped Navarro. 
“We could do the same for you.” 

“That is a small thing. But the 
gods are needful to our life. It is the 
gods who put life into our eggs. 
Without them no young would be 
hatched. It is thus necessary that we 
obey them.” 

“Cut it out, Juan,” snarled Kings- 
bury. “I’ve been through this rig- 
marole a hundred times. It’s no use.” 

Navarro nodded absent-mindedly 
and trudged off. They switched to a 
different radio band, one the natives 
could not “hear,” but said nothing 
for a while. 

“Has it ever occurred to you,” 
asked Navarro finally, “that nobody 
has ever seen a male Mercurian?” 

“Sure. They’re hermaphrodites.” 

“That was assumed by the first 
expedition. An assumption only, of 
course. They could not vivisect a live 
Twonk—” 

“/ sure could!” 

“ — and the old ones all go out on 
Dayside to die. The only chance for 
anatomical studies would be to find 
one which had met a violent end 


60 

here in Twilight, and there was al- 
ways too much else to do.” 

“Well, why shouldn’t they be her- 
maphrodites? Oysters are.” 

“At certain times of the year. But 
oysters are a low form of life. On 
Earth, Mars and Venus, the higher 
one goes on the evolutionary scale, 
the more sharp the distinction be- 
tween the sexes." 

“All right, maybe their males are 
very small.” 

“As with some fish? Possibly. But 
most improbable. All their eggs are 
about the same size, you know,” 

“Who cares?” snorted Kingsbury, 
“I just want to go home.” 

“I care. I have a tidy mind. And, 
too — Earth needs that uranium and 
thorium. We will never get it unless 
we can circumvent this religion of 
theirs, either by persuading the gods 
or by . . . hm . . . destroying the 
cult. But to accomplish the latter, we 
will first have to understand the 
creed.” 

They came out on a road of sorts, 
a narrow track in the shale, stamped 
out by thousands of years of feet. 
There were natives working in the 
fields, and before the hive they could 
see smiths hammering cold iron and 
copper into implements. A few 
young were in sight, unhumanly 
solemn at their play. None paid any 
attention to the outworlders. 

Navarro pointed to a smith. “It is 
true what the Twonk said, that the 
gods supply their metal?” 

“Yes,” said Kingsbury. “At least, 
so I’ve been told, and I do think the 


FANTASY AND SCIENCE FICTION 

Twonks are unable to tell a lie. Be- 
ing radio-telepathic, y’know, they 
couldn’t lie to each other, so the 
idea would never occur to them.” 

“Hm . . . they do not have fire 
here, not in this sleazy atmosphere. 
They must have been in a crude 
neolithic stage until the gods started 
smelting ores for them. I imagine 
that could be done with mirrors 
focusing the Dayside heat on — oh, a 
mixture of crushed hematite and 
some reducing material.” 

“Uh-huh. And the gods get the 
pick of whatever the Twonks make 
out of the metal.” Kingsbury cleared 
his throat to spit, remembered he 
was in a spacesuit, and swallowed, 
“It’s perfectly clear, Juan. There are 
two intelligent races on Mercury. 
The Daysiders have set up in busi- 
ness as gods. They don’t want 
humans around because they’re 
afraid we’ll spoil their racket and 
make ’em work for a living.” 

“Obviously,” said Navarro. “The 
problem is, how to convince the 
Twonks of this? To do that, we 
shall first have to study the nature 
of the Dayside beings.” 

They mounted a razorback ridge 
and clapped down glare filters. Be- 
fore them was the sun. 

It burned monstrous on the hori- 
zon, a white fury that drowned the 
stars and leaped back off the with- 
ered land. Even here, with shadows 
lapping his feet and the refrigera- 
tion unit at full blast, Kingsbury 
felt how the heat licked at him. 

“God!” he whispered. “How far 


LIFE CYCLE 


61 


can we go into that blazing hell?” 

“Not very far,” said Navarro. “We 
shall have to hope some Twonks 
died close by. Come!” He broke 
into long low-gravity bounds, down 
the slope and out onto the plain. 

Squinting through tormented eyes, 
Kingsbury made out a shimmering 
pool at the horizon. It spouted as he 
watched . . . molten lead? With the 
speed he had and the sharp curvature 
of the surface, the sun was rising 
visibly as he ran. 

Even here there was life. A crystal- 
line tree squatted near a raw pin- 
nacle, stiff and improbable. A small 
thing with many legs scuttcred 
away, shell too bright to look at. Bas- 
ically, Dayside life had the silicate 
form of Twilight, many of the com- 
pounds identical — a common ances- 
try a billion years ago, when Mer- 
cury still had water — but this life 
was adapted to a heat that made lead 
run liquid. 

“This . . . road . . . goes on,” 
panted Kingsbury. “Must be ... a 
graveyard . . , somewhere — ” 

His skin was prickling now, as 
charged particles ate in through the 
armor. His underclothing was limp 
with sweat. His tongue felt like a 
swollen lump of wood. 

This was farther into Dayside 
than men had ever gone before. 
Through the dizziness, he won- 
dered how even a Twonk could sur- 
vive the trip . . . only, of course, 
they didn’t. The natives had told 
the first expedition that their old 
ones went out into the sunlight to 


die. There’d be no one to bury them, 
and the shells weren’t volatile — 

He stumbled over the first one 
before he knew it. When his gaunt- 
lets touched the ground, he yelled. 
Navarro pulled him up again. There 
was a dazzle in their helmets, they 
squinted and gasped with dry lungs 
and thought they heard their brains 
sizzling. 

Dead Twonks, thousands of them, 
scattered around like broken ma- 
chines, empty-eyed, but the light de- 
monic on their carapaces . . . Kings- 
bury picked one up. Even in Mercur- 
ian gravity, it seemed to have oddly 
little weight. Navarro took another. 
Its arms and legs flapped horribly 
as he ran back eastward. 

They never remembered that run- 
ning. After they had fallen on the 
dark side of the ridge, they must 
have fainted, for the next memory 
was of stirring and a slow awareness 
that they were embracing dead Mer- 
curians. 

Kingsbury put his lips to his can- 
teen nozzle and sucked water up 
the hose. It was nearly scalding, but 
he had never drained so sweet a 
draught. Then he. lay and shud- 
dered for another long while. 

“Bueno" croaked his companion. 
“We made it.” 

They sat up and regarded their 
loot. Both shells had split open 
down the front, along the line of 
weakness where the ventral scutes 
joined. They had expected to find 
the shriveled remnants of “organic” 
material, dried flesh and blackened 


62 

tendons and collapsed veins. But 
there was nothing. 

The shells were empty. 

It was a long circuitous walk back 
to the ship. They didn’t want any 
natives to see them. After that there 
was a wonderful time of sleeping 
while Amelia worked. 

They didn’t stop to think about 
the implications until it was too late 
to think very much at all. Sunrise 
would occur at the temple in a few 
hours, and it was quite a ways from 
here. 

Antella’s claw-like hands gestured 
proudly at the shells. “See, I have 
hinged the front plates so you can 
get in and out. Your radios are con- 
nected to the antennae, though how 
you expect to talk Mercurian if any- 
one converses with you, I do not 
understand. This harness will sup- 
port the shells around your suits. Na- 
turally, you cannot use the lower 
arms, but I have wired them into a 
life-like position.” 

Kingsbury drew hard on a cigaret. 
It might be the last one he ever 
smoked. “Nice work,” he said. 
“Now as for the plan itself, we’ll just 
have to play by ear. We’II get inside 
the temple with the others, see what 
we can see, and hope to get out 
again undamaged. If necessary, we’ll 
shuck these disguises and fight our 
way back here. Even in spacesuits, 
we can outrun any Twonk.” 

Navarro shook his head. “A most 
forlorn hope,” he muttered. “And if 
we should succeed, do you realize 


FANTASY AND SCIENCE FICTION 

how many xenologists will pour the 
vials of wrath on our heads for 
disrupting native culture?” 

“That bothers me a lot,” snorted 
Kingsbury. 

“I, of course, can claim to be 
carrying out the historic traditions 
of my own people,” said Navarro 
blandly. “It was not the Saracens, 
but the Basques who slew Roland at 
Roncesvalles.” 

“Why’d they do that?” 

“They didn’t like the way Charle- 
magne was throwing his weight 
around. Unfortunately, you, my 
friend, cannot say you are merely 
preserving your own culture. These 
Twonks have no scalps to lift.” 

“Hell,” said Kingsbury, “my cul- 
ture for the past hundred years has 
been building skyscrapers and 
bridges. Come on, let’s shove.” 

It was a clumsy business getting 
into the shells, but once the plates 
were latched shut and the harness 
adjusted, it was not too awkward a 
disguise. The heads could not be 
turned on their necks when you 
wore a spacehelmet inside, but An- 
tella had filled the empty eye-sockets 
with wide-angle lenses. Kingsbury 
hoped he wouldn’t be required to 
wink, or move all four arms, or 
waggle the ovipositor, or speak Mer- 
curian; but otherwise, if he was 
careful, he ought to pass muster. 

The humans left the ship and 
went down the valley, moving with 
the stiff native stride. Not till they 
were past the hive did they speak. 
Kingsbury’s belly muscles were taut. 


LIFE CYCLE 


63 


but none of the autochthones paid 
him any special heed. It was for- 
tunate that the Mercurians were not 
given to idle gossip. 

Presently he found himself on a 
broad, smoothly laid road. It ran 
straight northwest, through a forest 
of gleaming barrel-shaped plants 
where the small wildlife of Twilight 
scuttled off into the dusk. More and 
more natives joined them, tall sol- 
emn figures streaming in from side 
roads onto the highway. Many were 
laden with gifts, iron tools and flash- 
ing gems and exquisitely wrought 
stone vessels . . . did the gods drink 
molten lead out of those? There was 
no speech on the communication 
band, only the quiet pulse of cur- 
rents oscillating in nerves that were 
silver wires. 

Ghostly journey, through a dark 
chaotic wilderness of rock and crys- 
talline forest, among a swarm of 
creatures out of dreams. It shocked 
Kingsbury how small man and 
man’s knowledge were in the illimit- 
able universe. 

He switched to the other band 
and said harshly, “Juan, maybe we 
are nuts. Even if we get away with 
it, what can we hope to do? Suppose 
one of these Twonks pulled a simi- 
lar stunt in your church — wouldn’t 
that just make you fighting mad?’’ 

“Yes, of course,” answered the 
other man. “Unless by such means 
the Twonk proved to me that my 
faith was based on a fraud. Natur- 
ally, she would not be able to do so; 
but assuming for the sake of dis- 


cussion that she did, my philosophy 
would come crashing down about 
my ears. Then I should be quite 
ready to listen to her.” 

“But God! How can we imagine 
these critters think like us?” 

“They don’t. But that is in our 
favor, because they are actually more 
logical than we humans. They have 
freely admitted that the only reason 
they obey the gods is that those are 
essential to fertility.” 

“Well . . . maybe the gods are!” 

“Yes, yes, I am quite sure of it. 
But I am equally sure that there is 
nothing supernatural about it. Sup- 
pose, for instance, that a dose of 
sunlight is necessary for reproduc- 
tion. A class of priestesses may have 
capitalized on this fact — I am not 
sure how, given the Mercurian tele- 
pathy, but perhaps the priestesses can 
think on a different band. Now if 
we can show that the sunlight alone 
is required, and the priestesses are 
mere window-dressing, then I am 
sure the Twonks will get rid of 
them.” 

Kingsbury grinned with scant 
mirth. “And we’re supposed to find 
this out and prove it in one 
ghmpse?” 

“This was originally your idea, 
amigo.” 

“Yeh. Please don’t rub it in.” 

They walked on, silent, thinking 
of Earth’s remote loveliness. An hour 
passed. It grew hotter, and the west- 
ern blaze climbed into the sky until 
you could see the great lens of 
zodiacal light just above the hills. 


64 

and more natives joined the proces- 
sion until there were several thous- 
and pouring along the road. Kings- 
bury and Navarro stayed close to- 
gether, near the middle of the crowd. 

Black against the blinding sky, 
they saw the temple. It stood on a 
high ridge, a columned building of 
red granite, curiously reminiscent of 
old Egyptian work. A flat roof cov- 
ered the front half; the rear was 
open, but walled off from sight. 

The pilgrimage moved between 
basalt statues onto a flagged plaza 
before the temple. There it halted, 
motionless as only a non-breathing 
Mercurian can be. Kingsbury tuned 
back to the communication band 
and heard that they were chanting — 
at least, he supposed the eery whin- 
ing rise-and-fall of radio pulses was 
music. He kept his own mouth shut; 
no one in that entranced collectivity 
would realize he wasn’t joining in. 

A line of Mercurians emerged from 
the colonnade. They must be priest- 
esses or servitors, for there were 
geometric patterns daubed on their 
shells. They halted before the wor- 
shipers. Gravely, those who bore 
gifts advanced, bowed down, and 
laid them at the feet of the clergy. 
The articles were picked up and 
carried back into the temple. 

Kingsbury sweated and shivered 
in his spacesuit. What if the ritual 
included some fancy dance.'* He 
hoped Navarro, who had the gun, 
could break out of his shell fast 
enough to use it. None of the 
natives were armed, and a human 


FANTASY AND SCIENCE FICTION 

was a match for any ten Mercurians, 
but there must be five thousand of 
them around him. 

The glare became a sudden flame. 
Sunrise! The shadow of the temple 
fell over the plaza, but Kingsbury 
narrowed his eyes to slits and still 
his head ached. 

He was dimly aware of the priest- 
esses returning. Their voices twit- 
tered, and the chant ended. A hun- 
dred Mercurians walked forth, up 
the stairs and into the doorway. An- 
other hundred and another hundred 
. . . They were not quite so impas- 
sive now. Kingsbury could see that 
those near him were trembling with 
excitement. 

Now his and Navarro’s line was 
on the move. He saw that one of the 
priestesses was leading them. They 
entered between the pillars and went 
across a room of mosaics and down 
a hall. At its end were passages 
leading to a number of roofless 
courts into which the sunlight fell. 
His party took one. 

The priestess stood aside, and the 
procession went on in. 

Against the radiance, Kingsbury 
could just see that there was a door- 
way on the western side and that 
daises were built into the floor. The 
Twonks were settling themselves on 
those, waiting — He switched to the 
private band: “Juan, what happens 
now.?’’ 

“What do you think.?” answered 
the Basque. His voice shook, but 
there was a wryness in it. “This is 
where they breed, isn’t it.?” 


LIFE CYCLE 


65 


“If one of ’em makes a pass at me 
—shall I try to play along?” 

“I think there is something against 
it in Leviticus — nor could you, ah, 
respond. ... We shall probably have 
to run for our lives. But they are all 
lying down. Find yourself a couch!” 

There was a stillness that 
stretched. The heat blasted and 
gnawed. Even the Twonks couldn’t 
endure it for very long at a time. 
Something would have to take place 
-soon, unless — 

“Juan! Maybe they’re what-you- 
call-it, virgin birth. Maybe the sun 
fertilizes them.” 

“No. Not parthenogenetic. It has 
not the evolutionary potentiality to 
produce intelligent life — it does not 
■give variant zygotes. Sunlight is nec- 
essary but not sufficient, I think. 
And I still cannot believe they are 
true hermaphrodites. Somewhere 
there must be males.” 

Almost, Kingsbury jerked. It was 
a tremendous effort to hold himself 
rigid, to wait in the shimmering, 
dazzling devil-dance of light as all 
the natives were waiting. “I’ve got 
it! The gods — they are the males!” 

“That is clear enough,” said Na- 
varro impatiently. “I deduced it 
hours ago. But if the case is so sim- 
ple, I am not hopeful. The males 
can still claim to be a different, 
superior order of life, as they indeed 
already do. We shall need a more 
fundamental discovery to upset this 
male-worshiping cult.” 

Navarro’s voice snapped off. 
Flame stood in the doorway. 


No . . . the tall lizard-like forms, 
in burnished coppery scales, 
wreathed in silvery vapor — they 
glowed, walking dragons, but they 
did not burn . . . they advanced, 
through the doorway and into the 
courtyard. Their beaks gaped, and 
the small dark eyes held sun-sparks, 
and the tails lashed their taloned 
feet. More and more of them, stalk- 
ing in, one to a Twonk, and ap- 
proaching with hands held out. 

The males of Mercury . . . Day- 
side life, charged with the energy 
from the sun which made new life 
possible, sweating out pure quick- 
silver to cool them so they wouldn’t 
fry their mates . . . was it any won- 
der they were thought divine? 

But Judas! It wasn’t possible! Male 
and female had to come from the 
same race, evolving together — they 
couldn’t have arisen separately, one 
in the hell of Dayside and one in 
the endless purgatorial dusk of Twi- 
light. The same mothers had to bear 
them; and yet, and yet, Twonk eggs 
only brought forth Twonks — 

Then — 

The knowledge bit home as a 
dragon neared Kingsbury. The male 
was hesitating, the lean head wove 
back and forth ... an alien smell? 
A subtle wrongness of posture? 

The Mohawk sat up and yelled. 
The dragon spouted mercury vapor 
and crouched. Teeth made to shear 
through rock flashed in the open 
mouth. 

“Juan, I’ve got it! I know what 
they are! Let’s get back!” 


66 


FANTASY AND SCIENCE FICTION 


Navarro was on his feet, fumbling 
at the belly of his disguise. Latches 
clicked free, and he scrambled out 
of it. The nearest dragon leaped. 
Navarro’s gun bucked. The male 
fell with a hole blown through him 
... so much for the immortal gods, 
the heavenly showmen. Kingsbury 
was out of his own shell now. A 
female lunged at him. He got her 
around the waist and pitched her 
into the mob. Whirling, he slugged 
his way toward the door, Navarro 
covering his back. 

The dragons snapped at them but 
didn’t dare attack. There was a mo- 
ment of fury, then the humans were 
out on the plaza. They began run- 
ning. 

“Now we’ve got to beat them back 
to the ship,” panted Kingsbury. 

‘-More than that,” said Navarro. 
“We must reach safety before they 
come near enough to call the hive 
and have us intercepted. I wonder 
if we can.” 

“A man might try,” said Kings- 
bury. 

The forward port showed some 
thousands of armed Mercurian fe- 
males. They ringed in the ship, wait- 
ing, too rational to batter with use- 
less clubs at the hull and too angry 
to depart. There were more of them 
arriving every minute. 

“I wonder — ” Antella peered out. 
He spoke coolly, but his feathers 
stood erect with tension. “I wonder 
if they can do worse to us than they 
have already done. We will starve iio 


faster besieged in here than walking 
freely around.” 

“They can get to us if they want 
to work at it,” said Kingsbury. “And 
I think they do. They could rig up 
some kind of battering ram — ” 

Navarro lit his pipe and puffed 
hard. “It is our task to persuade 
them otherwise,” he said. “Do you 
believe they will listen.?” 

Kingsbury went over to the ship’s 
radio and sat down and operated 
the controls with nervous fingers. 
“Let’s hope so. It’s our only chance. 
Do you want to talk to ’em.?” 

“Go ahead. You are better with 
the English language than I. I will 
perhaps put in an oar.” 

Kingsbury switched on the speak- 
er and brought bis lips to the micro- 
phone. “Hello, out there,” he said. 

His voice cut through the seething 
of Mercurian tones. It was eldritch 
how they snapped off all at once. 
English, clear and grammatical and 
subtly distorted, answered him: 

“What do you wish to say? You 
have violated the temple. The gods 
order that you must die." 

“The gods would say that,” re- 
plied Kingsbury. “But they are not 
gods at all. They want to get rid of 
us because we can tell you the truth. 
They’ve lied and cheated you for I 
don’t know how many centuries.” 

“Truth, lie, cheat. Those are words 
we do not know.” 

“Well . . . uh . . . truth is a cor- 
rect statement, a statement of what is 
real. A lie is a statement which is 
not truth, but made on purpose, 


LIFE CYCLE 


67 


knowing it to be false. Cheating is 
. . . well . . . damn it, I wish we 
had a dictionary along! The gods 
have lied to you so you would do 
what they wanted. That’s cheating.” 

“We think we understand,” said 
the toneless voice. “It is a new con- 
cept to us, but a possible one. The 
gods do not speak so we can hear 
them. They—” conference, presum- 
ably recalling what the first expedi- 
tion had told about radio — “they 
use a different band. They com- 
municate with us by gestures only. 
So are you implying that they are 
not what they claim to be and have 
made life unnecessarily difficult for 
us ? ” 

“That’s it, pal.” Kingsbury still 
didn’t hke the Twonks much, but 
he was grateful they were so quick 
on the uptake. “Having seen what 
goes on in the temple, we know 
what these self-appointed gods are. 
They’re nothing but the males of 
your own species.” 

“What does the word ‘male’ de- 
note.^” 

“Well — ” Kingsbury ground to a 
halt. Precisely how did you explain 
it in nickel words when Junior asked 
where he came from? He gave Na- 
varro a helpless look. The Basque 
grinned, leaned over the itiicrophone, 
and gave a simple account. 

The female collectivity thought 
about it for a while, standing in 
burnished motionlessness, then said 
with an unaccustomed slowness: 
“That is logical. We have long ob- 
served that certain of the animals 


go through the same motions of 
fertilization as we with the gods. 
But whether you wish to call them 
gods or males makes no difference. 
They are still the great ones who 
give life.” 

“They don’t give any more life 
than you do,” snapped Kingsbury. 
“They need you just as much as you 
need them. In fact . . . they are 
yourselves!" 

“That is an irrational statement.” 
Was there a defensive overtone in 
the voice? “Our eggs bring forth 
only females, so it is reasonable to 
suppose that the gods are born 
directly of the sun. A Mercurian 
hatches from an egg after the god- 
male has given life. She grows up 
and in her turn visits the godmales 
and brings forth eggs. At last, grown 
old, she goes to the sunlands and 
dies. There is no missing period in 
which she could become a godmale,” 

“Oh, yeah ? What about after she’s 
gone sunside?” 

Mercurian language gabbled at 
them. 

Kingsbury spoke fast: “We went 
out there ourselves and found the 
shells of those you thought had 
died. But the shells were empty! 
You know you have muscles, nerves, 
guts, organs. Those ought to remain 
in a dried-out condition. But I re- 
peat, the shells were empty!” 

“Then . . . but we have only your 
statement.” 

“You can check up on it. We can 
rebuild a spacesuit for one of you, 
furnish enough protection from the 


68 


FANTASY AND SCIENCE FICTION 


sun for you to go out there a while, 
long enough to see.” 

“But what happens? What is the 
significance of the empty shells?” 

“Isn’t it obvious, you dunder- 
heads? You’re a kind of larval stage. 
At the proper time, you go out into 
the sun. Its radiation changes you. 
You’re changed so much that all 
memory of your past state disap- 
pears — your whole bodies have to be 
reconstructed, to live on Dayside. 
But when the process is finished, 
you break out of the shell . . . and 
now you’re male. 

“Yom don’t know that. The male 
comes out as if newly born — 
hatched, I mean. Probably his kind 
meet him and help him and teach 
him. The males discovered the truth 
somehow . . . well, it was easy 
enough for them, since they can 
watch the whole life cycle. Instead 
of helping you females, as nature 
intended, they set themselves up as 
gods and lived off you, taking more 
than they gave. And when they 
learned about us, they forbade you 
to have dealings with us — because 
they were afraid we’d learn the truth 
and expose them. 

“But they need you! All you have 
to do is refuse to visit the temples 
for a few sunrises. Then see how 
fast they come to terms!” 


“Lysistrata,” murmured Navarro. 

For a time, then, the radio hissed 
and crackled with the thinking of 
many minds linked into one. Amelia 
sat unmoving, Navarro fumbled 
with his pipe, Kingsbury gnawed 
his lips and drummed on the radio 
panel. 

Finally: “This is astonishing news. 
We must investigate. You will pro- 
vide one of us with a suit in which 
to inspect Dayside.” 

“Easy enough,” said Kingsbury. 
His tone jittered. “And if you find 
the shells really are empty, as you 
will— what then?” 

“We shall follow your advice. You 
will be given admittance to your 
supplies, and we will discuss ar- 
rangements for the mining of those 
ores which you desire.” 

Navarro found himself uncon- 
trollably shaking. “Saint Nicholas, 
patron of wanderers,” he whispered, 
“I will build you a shrine for this.” 

“The males may make trouble,” 
warned Antella. 

“If their nature is as you claim,” 
said the Twonk horde, “they will 
not be difficult to control.” 

Kingsbury, the American, won- 
dered if he had planted the seeds of 
another matriarchy. Underneath all 
the rejoicing, he felt a vague sense of 
guilt. 



I’ve often referred to Ellery Queen’s Mystery Magazine as our sister 
publication. It’s now evident that the sistership is virtually Siamese: 
we share much of the same bloodstream. Winners in EQMM’s re- 
cently concluded Twelfth Annual Contest include Poul Anderson, 
Robert Bloch, Miriam Allen dePord, G. C. Edmondson and Manly 
Wade Wellman, along with a half dozen less frequent P&SP contribu- 
tors; and the winner of the $1500 Pirst Prize was Avram Davidson. 
In introducing Davidson’s fine The Necessity of His Condition 
(EQMM, April, 1957), Queen writes, "He has the astonishing knack 
of being able to write about any geographical background, and about 
any culture, ancient or modern, alien or native — and always with the 
most startling authenticity.” 1 concur wholeheartedly: Davidson’s 
EQMM winner is about the ante helium South; his last P&SP story 
was about Hanoverian England; and each, one would think, could 
have been written only by an intensive specialist. Nor is Davidson’s 
ability to get under the skin of a culture limited to the long-ago and 
far-away; this new story, brief but sharply limned, could give an alien 
anthropologist a valuable insight into the mores of prosperous middle- 
class Southern California. 


Summerland 

by AVRAM DAVIDSON 


Mary King said — and i’m sure it 
was true — that she couldn’t remem- 
ber a thing about the s&nce at Mrs. 
Porteous’s. Of course no one tried to 
refresh her memory. Mary is a large 
woman, with a handsome, ruddy 
face, and the sound of that heavy 
body hitting the floor and the sight 
of her face at that moment — it was 
gray and loose-mouthed and flac- 


cid — so unnerved me that I am 
ashamed to say I just sat there, 
numb. Others scurried around and 
cried for water or thrust cushions 
under her head or waved vials of 
ammoniated lavender in front of 
her, but I just sat frozen, looking 
at her, looking at Mrs. Porteous loll- 
ing back in the armchair, Charley 
King’s voice still ringing in my ears. 


69 


70 

and my heart thudding with shock. 

I would not have thought, nor 
would anyone else, at first impres- 
sion, that the Kings were the s&nce 
type. My natural tendency is to as- 
sociate that sort of thing with wheat 
germ and vegeburgers and complete 
syndromes of psychosomatic illness- 
es, but Charley and his wife were 
beef-eaters ail the way and they 
shone with health and cheer and 
never reported a snifSe, Be exceed- 
ingly wary of categories, I told my- 
self; despise no man’s madness. 
Their hearty goodwill, if it palled 
upon me, was certainly better for 
my mother than another neighbor’s 
whining or gossip would have been. 
The Kings, who were her best 
friends, devoted to her about 500% 
of the time I myself was willing to 
give. For years I had lived away 
from home, our interests and activi- 
ties were too different, there seemed 
little either of us could do when 
long silences fell upon us as we sat 
alone. It was much better to join 
the Kings. 

“Funny thing happened down at 
the office today — ” Charley often be- 
gan like that. Ordinarily this open- 
ing would have shaken me into 
thoughts of a quick escape. Some- 
how, though, as Charley told it, his 
fingers rippling the thick, iron-gray 
hair, his ruddy face quivering not 
to release a smile or laugh before 
the point of the story was revealed 
— somehow, it did seem funny when 
Charley told it. To me, the Kings 
were older people, but they were 


FANTASY AND SCIENCE FICTION 

younger than my mother, and I am 
sure they helped keep her from 
growing old too fast. It was worth 
it to me to eat vast helpings of but- 
ter-pecan ice cream when the Real 
Me hungered and slavered for a 
glass of beer with pretzel sticks on 
the side. 

If tarot cards, Rosicrucian litera- 
ture, s&nces, and milder non-con- 
tortionistic exercises made an incon- 
gruous note in the middle<lass, 
middle-aged atmosphere the Kings 
trailed with them like “rays of lam- 
bent dullness” — why, it was harm- 
less. It was better to lap up pyramid- 
ology than lunatic-fringe politics. 
Rather let Mother join hands on the 
ouija board than start cruising the 
Great Circle of quack doctors to 
find a cure for imaginary backaches. 
So I ate baked alaska and discussed 
the I Am and astral projection, and 
said “Be still, my soul” to inner 
yearnings for highballs and carnal 
conversation. After ail, it was only 
once a week. And I never saw any 
signs that my mother took any of 
it more seriously than the parchesi 
game which followed the pistachio 
or peanut-crunch. 

I am an architect. Charley was In 
The Real Estate Game. A good 
chance, you might think, for one 
hand to wash the other, but it hardly 
ever happened that our commercial 
paths crossed. Lanais, kidney- 
shaped swimming pools, picture 
windows, copper-hooded fireplaces, 
hi-fi sets in the walls — that was my 
sort of thing. “Income property” — 


SUMMERLAND 


71 


that was Charley’s. And a nice in- 
come it was, too. Much better than 
mine. 

How does that go? — Evil com- 
munications corrupt good manners? 
— Charley might have said some- 
thing of that sort if I’d ever told 
him what Ed Hokinson told me. 
Hoke is on the planning commis- 
sion, so what with this and that, 
we see each other fairly often. Co- 
incidence’s arm didn’t stretch too 
long before Charley king’s name 
came up between us. Idly talking, I 
repeated to Hoke a typical Charlcy- 
ism. Charley had been having ten- 
ant trouble. 

“Of course there are always what 
you might call the Inescapable 
Workings of Fate, which all of us 
are subject to, just as we are to, oh, 
say, the Law of Supply and De- 
mand,” said Charley, getting out- 
side some dessert. “But by and large 
whatever troubles people of that 
sort” — meaning the tenants — “think 
they have, it’s due to their own im- 
providence, for they won’t save, and 
each week or month the rent comes 
as a fresh surprise. And then you 
have certain politicians stirring them 
up and making them think they’re 
badly off when really they’re just 
the victims of Maya, or Illusion.” 
Little flecks of whipped cream were 
on his ruddy jowels. Mary nodded 
solemnly, two hundred pounds of 
well-fed, well-dressed, well-housed 
approbation. 

“Maya,” said Hoke. “That what 
he calls it? Like to come with me 


and see for yourself? / know Char- 
ley King,” Hoke said. In the end 
I did go. Interesting, in its own way, 
what I saw, but not my kind of 
thing at all. And the next day was 
the day Charley died. He was in- 
terred with much ceremony and ex- 
pense in a fabulous City of the 
Dead, which has been too well de- 
scribed by British novelists for me 
to try. Big, jolly, handsome, life-lov- 
ing Mr. Charley King. In a way, 
I missed him. And after that, of 
course, Mary and my mother were 
together even’ more. After that there 
was even less of the Akashic Docu- 
ments or Anthroposophism or Ve- 
danta, and more and more of se- 
ances. 

"1 know I have no cause to 
grieve,” Mary said. “1 know that 
Charley is happy. I just want him 
to tell me so. That’s not asking too 
much, is it?” 

How should I know? What is 
“too much”? I never do any asking, 
myself, or any answering for that 
matter. 

So off they went, my mother and 
Mrs. Mary King, and — ^if I couldn’t 
beg off — I. Mrs. Victory’s, Mrs. Rev- 
erend Ella Maybelle Snyder’s, Ma- 
dame Sophia’s, Mother Honeywell’s 
— every spirit-trumpet in the city 
must have been on time-and-a-half 
those days. They got little-girl an- 
gels and old-lady angels. They got 
doctors, lawyers, Indian chiefs, and 
young boy-babies — they must even 
have gotten Radio Andorra — but 
they didn’t get Charley. There were 


72 


FANTASY AND SCIENCE FICTION 


slate-messages and automatic writ- 
ings and ectoplasm enough to reach 
from here to Punxatawney, P. A, 
but if it reached to Charley he did- 
n’t reach back. All the mediums 
and all their customers had the same 
line: There is no grief in Summer- 
land, there is no pain in Summer- 
land — Summerland being the choice 
real estate development Upstairs, at 
least in the Spiritualist hep-talk. 
They all believed it, but somehow 
they all wanted to be assured. And 
after the seance, when all the spooks 
had gone back to Summerland, 
what a consumption of coffee, cup- 
cakes, and cold cuts. 

Some of the places were fancy, 
you bought “subscription” for the 
season’s performance and discussed 
parapsychology over canapes and 
sherry. Mrs. Porteous’ place, how- 
ever, was right out of the 1920’s, red 
velveteen por/eerr on wooden rings, 
and all. I almost fancied I could feel 
the ectoplasm when we came in, 
but it was just a heavy condensation 
of boiled cabbage steam and ham- 
burger smoke. 

Mrs. Porteous looked like a cari- 
cature of herself — down-at-hem eve- 
ning gown, gaudy but clumsy- cos- 
metic job, huge rings on each fin- 
ger, and, oh, that voice. Mrs. Porte- 
ous was the phoniest-looking, phon- 
iest-sounding, phoniest-aeftKg medi- 
um I have ever come across. She 
had a lady-in-waiting: sagging 
cheeks, jet-black page-boy bob or 
banp or whatever you call it, velvet 
tunic, so on. 


“Dear friends,” says the gentle- 
woman, striking a Woolworth gong, 
“might I have your attention please. 
I shall now request that there be no 
further smoking or talking whilst 
the seance is going on. ’We guaran- 
tee — nothing. We shall attempt — all. 
If there is doubt — if there is discord 
— the spirits may not come. For 
there is no doubt, no discord, there 
is no grief nor pain, in Summer- 
land.” So on. Let us join our hands 
... let us bow our heads ... I, of 
course, peeked. The Duchess was 
sitting on the starboard side of the 
incense, next to Mrs. Porteous, who 
was rolling her eyes and muttering. 
Then Charley King screamed. 

It was Mrs. Porteous’ mouth that 
it came from, it was her chest that 
heaved, but it was Charley King’s 
voice — I know his voice, don’t you 
think I know his voice? He 
screamed. My mother’s hand jerked 
away from mine. 

“The fire! The fire! Oh, Mary, 
how it burns, how — /" 

Then Mary fell forward from her 
seat, the lights went on, went off, 
then on again, everyone scurried 
around except me — I was frozen to 
my seat — and Mrs. Porteous — she 
lay back in her arm chair. Finally I 
got to my feet and somehow we 
managed to lift Mary onto a couch. 
The color came back to her face 
and she opened her eyes. 

“That’s all right, dear,” my moth- 
er said. 

“Oh my goodness 1” said Mary. 
“What happened? Did I faint? Isn’t 


SUMMERLAND 


73 


that silly. No, no, let me get up; 
we must start the s&nce.” 

Someone tugged at my sleeve. It 
was the Duchess. 

“Who was that?” she asked, look- 
ing at me shrewdly. “It was her 
husband, wasn’t it? Oh-yes-it-twas! 
He was burned to death, wasn’t he? 
And he hasn’t yet freed himself from 
his earthly ties so he can enter Sum- 
merland. He must of been a skep- 
tic.” 

“He didn’t burn to death,” I said. 
“He fell and broke his neck. And 
he wasn’t a skeptic.” 

(Hoke had said to me; “Of course 
the board was rotten; the whole 
house was rotten. All his property 


was like that. It should have been 
condemned years ago. No repairs, 
a family in each room, and the rent 
sky-higb — he must have been mak- 
ing a fortune. You saw those rats, 
didn’t you?” Hoke had asked. “Do 
you know what the death rate is in 
those buildings?”) 

The Duchess shook her head. Her 
face was puzzled. 

“Then it couldn’t of been her hus- 
band,” she said. “There is no pain,” 
she pointed out reasonably, “in Sum- 
merland.” 

“No,” I said to her. “No, I’m sure 
there isn’t. I know that.” 

But I knew Charley King. And 
I know his voice. 


Coming Next Month 

Very rare, in recent years, have been any Heinlein stories short of book-length 
novels; but next month we’ll have the pleasure of presenting a new short novelet 
by Robert A. Heinlein, The Menace from Earth — a charming story of young 
love and a wonderfully detailed picture, in the inimitable Heinlein manner, of 
civilization on the Moon. 'The same issue, on the stands around July 1, will fea- 
ture a short novel. The Lineman, by Walter M. Miller, Jr., who proves himself 
a very difiFerent writer from the creator of the canticles of St. Leibowitz in this 
harshly realistic and bitterly violent story of work and sex on Mars. Other stories 
(all new — no reprints) include a bittersweet fantasy of childhood by Mildred 
Clingerman, the first F&SF appearance of Old Pro Rog Phillips, and a dream- 
satire by mystery novelist and TV-writer Stuart Palmer. 

FANTASY AND SCIENCE FICTION F.July.7 I 

527 MadUon Avsnue, New York 22, N. Y. I 

Plaaie enter my subscription at once, to start with next Issue, ■ 

I enclose Q $4 for 1 year G $7 for 2 years J 

Name. . 

Address, 

City. 


mail \ 
this ) 

money- f 
saving ( 
coupon \ 
today / 


Zone. 


State. 


^he hit er ate <^onster 

by WILLIAM CHAPMAN WHITE 


If science keeps on conquering 
the unconquerable there just isn’t 
going to be anything left for the hu- 
man race to do. The news out of 
England, sent round the world by 
Reuters, shows to what ends science 
will reach. 

Scientists at Manchester Univer- 
sity, so the story says, have built an 
electronic computer into which a 
scattered collection of words can be 
fed. Deep down in the brain of the 
machine the words are put together 
and rearranged into complete sen- 
tences which are then poured out in 
legible form. The mere rumor of 
the existence of such a machine 
ought to strike terror into the hearts 
of the writers of radio and television 
serials, one-a-year novelists, and 
even columnists. 

With the story of the machine’s 
invention comes a sample of the 
machine’s work. One of the inven- 
tors, obviously tongue-tied in the 
presence of his beloved, decided to 
feed into the machine a whole series 
of endearing words, in the hope that 
the machine would grunt and grum- 
ble and give out with a love letter. 
Sure enough, it did. Presumably 
that inventor sent it off at once to 
his girl. 


Its text, verbatim, was: “Darling 
sweetheart, you are my avid fellow 
feeling. My affection curiously clings 
to your passionate wish. My liking 
yearns for your heart. You are my 
wistful sympathy, my tender liking. 
Yours beautifully.” 

If the girl fell for that and married 
the man she got what she deserved. 
Without the machine handy, the 
inventor is still tongue-tied. Break- 
fast conversation in that newly wed 
couple’s home must be odd at times. 

“I certainly don’t understand you, 
Cecil,” says the wife. “You used to 
write me such beautiful things be- 
fore we were married and now you 
never say a word.” 

Cecil just stares, wordless and 
helpless. 

“If you don’t want to show me 
any avid fellow feeling any more,” 
says the unhappy bride, “you might 
at least show me some wistful sym- 
pathy.” 

In the meantime Cecil and his 
friends, having solved the problem 
of writing love letters, are now busily 
working on a new machine that will 
carry on the rest of the courtship 
and let a man free for more impor- 
tant things, like inventing more such 
machines. 


© tgS4 by the New Yor\ Herald Tribune; reprinted by permission 
William Chapman White and the New York_ Herald Tribune 

74 


Miss Seahright, who usually scries into the future, this time casts her 
sensitive gaze upon the past, to bring us a bittersweet and touching 
fantasy of a Victorian wife who was offered an unexpected way out of 
the fetters of conventional propriety. 


£ithne 

by IDRIS SEABRIGHT 


When Eithne’s carrying a child 
began to be noticeable, Herbert sent 
her away from Corstophine, their 
villa, to Wracksand, a little hamlet 
on the North coast. He said he did 
it because the air at Corstophine 
was too heavy for a female in her 
condition, and it was true, the air 
at Corstophine was always dark 
with smoke and sharp with sulphur 
from the mills. But Eithne thought 
he was sending her away because 
he was ashamed of her. 

She did not much mind. Her 
maid was traveling with her, and 
Herbert, parting from her at the 
station, had put a generous number 
of ten pound notes in her reticule. 
Besides, though the obsessive grip 
of his dark, shamefaced feeling for 
her had begun to relax a little in 
the last month, she was still easier 
away from him. She was supposed 
to return to Corstophine for her 
confinement. Herbert had engaged 
a medical man in the neighborhood 
to attend her. Dr. Trevin was a 


modern practitioner, well thought- 
of, up-to-date in his methods. He,^ 
would give her chloroform wheo" 
her pains got bad. The Queen had 
had chloroform in 1853 when Prince 
Leopold was born. 

When Eithne and her companion 
got to Wracksand, there turned out 
to be no suitable place for Dawkins, 
the maid, to stay. Eithne bore her 
complaints patiently for perhaps fif- 
teen minutes. Then — her temper was 
uncertain these days; sometimes she 
was happy at her condition, some- 
times fiercely resentful of it — she 
told the woman abruptly to go back 
to Corstophine. Eithne could get 
along quite well with nobody but 
Mrs. Neville, her landlady, to attend 
her. She had liked Mrs. Neville on 
sight. 

Dawkins left, sulky and hysterical 
When Eithne had had time to rest a 
little from her journey, Mrs, Neville 
suggested ^that she might like to 
walk down to the sea and sit in the 
sun. Though it was October, it was 


75 


76 

a fine warm day, and a litde exercise 
was good for a woman who was 
carrying. 

Eithne was pleased. She got Mat- 
thew Arnold’s latest volume of 
poems from her valise — she liked 
poetry, though Herbert didn’t — and 
started toward the water. The coast 
at Wracksand was rocky, but Mrs. 
Neville’s directions had been care- 
ful. Eithne had no difficulty in find- 
ing the little sandy beach, enclosed 
between two jutting spits of rock. 

The sun was warm*. Eithne did 
not open her book. She sat with her 
hands loosely about her knees, think- 
ing languidly of Herbert . . . Cor- 
stophine . . . Dawkins . . . Her- 
bert again. Herbert talked so much 
of duty. It was, she supposed, her 
duty to have the baby. At any rate, 
she was having it. 

How warm the sun was! Sudden- 
ly Eithne felt like a prisoner within 
the heavy black serge of her dress. 
She stood up. Mrs. Neville had said 
that nobody ever came to the beach, 
not even fishermen. With eager, 
guilty fingers Eithne began to un- 
button the buttons — the dozens of 
buttons — on her bodice. She pulled 
the dress off over her shoulders, 
thinking: how heavy, heavier even 
than the child I’m carrying. And 
her underclothing, stiff with hand- 
made lace and much embroidery, 
was heavy too. 

She stood naked at last. She 
looked about herself anxiously, but, 
no, nobody ever came here. The 
waves that broke on the little beach 


FANTASY AND SCIENCE FICTION 

were white with foam, but the water 
itself was a tender dark gray-blue. 
Her eyes half-shut against the 
shameful sight of her own body, she 
waded hesitantly out until she stood 
in water over her knees. 

She had never been in the sea be- 
fore without a bathing-dress. The 
water was cold, but there was some- 
thing delicious in its very iciness. 
Hastily she knelt, and sluiced the 
next waves over her shoulders and 
her breasts. Oh! Oh! How cold, how 
sweet! Then she hurried back to the 
pile of clothing she had left on the 
sand. 

She had nothing to dry on. The 
air dried her, and left a prickle of 
salt on her skin. She got into her 
clothing again, finding that she re- 
sented its weight less now that she 
had been out of it. 

She was almost done with the but- 
tons on the heavy black bodice when 
she saw, far out beyond the jutting 
rocks, forty yards or so from the 
shore, a cluster of bobbing heads. 
For a moment shame froze her. 
Then she laughed. Seals, only seals, 
ft didn’t matter if they had been 
watching her. 

When she got back to the cottage 
Mrs. Neville was preparing a meal, 
something between an early supper 
and a late tea. “Was it pleasant by 
the water, ma’am?’’ she asked as she 
scalded out the teapot. 

“Very pleasant,’’ Eithne answered. 
“The sun was nicely warm. Oh, and 
I saw some seals.” 

“Seals!” Mrs. Neville set the 


EITHNE 

brown-glazed teapot down with a 
thump. “Fancy that! Excuse me for 
asking, ma’am, but are you quite 
sure? There haven’t been seals at 
Wracksand since my grandmother’s 
day, thirty or forty years ago.” 

“Quite sure,” Eithne answered. “I 
saw their heads, you know. Round, 
dark heads.” 

“Yes. . . . 'Well, I’m glad to hear 
they are back. The people of the sea 
— that’s what folk in these parts call 
them, ma’am — are lucky. Fancy their 
coming back, after all these years!” 

“I suppose it was the seal fishers 
drove them away?” Eithne asked, 
sinking down in the chair Mrs. Ne- 
ville had pulled out for her. 

“So some say. My grandmother al- 
ways’ held it was the wickedness of 
folk nowadays that made them leave. 
She said it wasn’t natural to dig the 
earth for iron and coal. And oh, she 
thought it dreadful to make the lit- 
tle ones work so hard beside the 
looms in the cruel cotton factories. 
The dogs, she used to say, were bet- 
ter off than many an English child.” 

“That’s progress,” Eithne said, 
echoing Herbert. “We have to have 
progress.” 

“Progress!” Mrs, Neville’s dark 
eyes flashed. “Nay, but it’s wicked- 
ness! . . . Excuse me, ma’am. Eat 
your supper, do. There’s a fresh 
hearth-baked loaf for you, and sweet 
butter from Mrs. May’s churning. A 
bit of lettuce from the garden. And 
I boiled two of the speckled eggs. 
They’re the tasty ones.” 

Eithne buttered a slice of the 


77 

crumbly warm bread and began to 
pour herself a cup of tea. “Put lots of 
milk to your tea, ma’am,” Mrs. Ne- 
ville advised her. “Milk’s the staff of 
life to a childing woman.” 

When she undressed for bed that 
night, Eithne touched her tongue to 
her wrist. She laughed to find she 
could still taste salt on it. 

The weather held on fine, and 
Eithne went every day to the little 
beach. She took her lunch with her 
— eggs or cheese, slices of brown 
loaf, and milk in a flask — in a little 
wicker basket, and stayed until the 
sun was low and it began to grow 
chill. She sat with her hands in her 
lap, not thinking, watching the 
waves eternally washing against the 
sand. She often saw the heads of 
seals, sometimes far out, sometimes 
so near that she could have tossed a 
pebble out to them. 

She wrote to Herbert weekly, and 
got letters as often from him. Busi- 
ness was good, he wrote, he missed 
her. There had been an accident at 
the mills; two workingmen had 
been badly scalded when one of the 
vats that held the molten steel broke. 
Nothing serious. The firm had two 
new contracts. He would send Daw- 
kins to fetch her back to Corstophine 
at the middle of January. He had 
told the maid to use her time in 
making dresses for Eithne’s child. 

Eithne crumpled up the letters 
from Herbert as soon as she read 
them, and tossed them in the fire- 
place. She disliked thinking about 


78 

Corstophine, Herbert, the mills. She 
was impatient to get back to the 
beach and forget them. 

She longed to undress again and 
let the wonderful cold sea water ca- 
ress her. No, it might be bad for the 
child. But the nagging backache 
that had troubled her so at Cor- 
stophine had left her. Her body felt 
relaxed and sound. 

Toward the end of November the 
long spell of fine weather broke. It 
rained hard; day after day there was 
driving wind or choking fog. Eithne 
had to stay in the house by the fire. 
She tried crocheting, but she had 
never cared for fancy work. She was 
always laying the hook down and 
yawning. She preferred to help Mrs. 
Neville with the household tasks, or 
to listen to the older woman talk. 

At first Mrs. Neville talked of the 
people of the village: of Parson, who 
was a good man, and so learned that 
he could read books in those old 
hard languages; of Mrs. May, who 
kept two cows and had been mid- 
wife to Mrs. Neville when she had 
had her own children; of Billy At- 
kins, who had run away to sea, and 
of Norah Pollock, who had run off 
to London and come to no good 
end, and of a host of others who had 
lived in the village, fished or farmed 
there, and died where they had been 
born. 

Then, when she grew more at ease 
with Eithne, she began to tell her the 
stories her own mother had told her. 
Fairy stories, Eithne supposed one 
would call them. She told of brown- 


FANTASY AND SCIENCB FICTION 

ies and sea fairies, of the Good 
Neighbors, who Eithne gathered 
were land spirits, of hags and de- 
mons, of the people of the sea, and 
of the paths that lead to fairyland. 
Eithne listened with drowsy pleas- 
ure. Sometimes Mrs. Neville would 
interrupt herself to say with a laugh 
that Parson liked her to tell the old 
stories, and she supposed she had 
got into the way of telling them to 
the quality. 

At last, after nearly three weeks of 
bad weather, the sky cleared. Mrs. 
Neville bundled Eithne up in layer 
on layer of woolen shawls, and sent 
her out to take the air. Eithne 
walked down to the beach. 

The sun’s rays were weak, but he 
rode in a sky of pale, unclouded 
blue. The water today was choppy, 
vexed by cross-currents, but from ev- 
ery broken pale blue surface there 
was reflected a dazzle of light. 
Eithne sat down in the sun, out of 
the wind. The light on the water 
hurt her eyes. She dozed. 

She woke with a start. What had 
she been dreaming? Some nonsense, 
out of the stories Mrs. Neville had 
been telling her — something about 
the two paths that human beings 
took, the hard road to heaven and 
the broad pleasant road to hell, and 
the third path, the pretty winding 
path that leads to fairyland. 

Nonsense. But suppose it were 
true. Suppose that, besides the two 
known ways, there were a tliird one. 
the road to fairyland? Nonsense. 
Nonsense. There was only one path 


EITHNE 


79 


to be taken, the path of duty — ^Her- 
bert spoke so much of duty — and 
Eithne’s next duty was returning to 
Corstophine to have her child. 

Eithne felt a throb of hatred to- 
ward Corstophine. The rooms were 
too large, always cold, dank with the 
raw smell of new 'plaster. The serv- 
ants were obsequious and attentive, 
but they had spiteful eyes. Even the 
garden, that might have given her 
pleasure, had been frozen by topiary 
work and formal parterres into a 
rigid, distasteful lesson in geometry. 
And Dr. Trevin — how could she ex- 
pose her travailing body to his cold 
scrutiny } He was a formal, dry little 
man with sharp manners. For all his 
modernity and his neat pince-nez, 
she disliked him and was afraid of 
him. 

Oh, but she had to. It was her 
duty. — Why shouldn’t she stay in 
Wracksand and have her baby here? 

Eithne knotted her fingers togeth- 
er. She felt giddy with excitement. 
Was it really so foolish? Mrs. May 
was a clever midwife; Mrs. Neville 
said that she had saved the life of a 
woman in Pawlish that two doctors 
had given up. And Mrs. Neville her- 
self was so kind. She treated Eithne 
like a daughter. Eithne felt safe and 
happy with her. It would be easy to 
have a baby here. 

Herbert would be furious. He was 
a choleric man; Eithne had seen 
him, in moments of exasperation, 
actually gnashing his teeth. But 
though he might send Dawkins to 
fetch her back to Corstophine, Daw- 


kins was only a servant. Dawkins 
could not compel her. And Herbert 
himself was much too fond of his 
dignity to make himself ridiculous 
by attempting to coerce a woman in 
the last stages of pregnancy. There 
were some advantages in being a 
woman, after all. No. She would 
stay here. She would write to Her- 
bert tonight. 

When she got back to the cottage, 
she told Mrs. Neville what she had 
decided. “I’m so glad,’’ the older 
woman said. Her eyes glowed. “Just 
fancy, a baby in the house again! It 
will be like old times. 

“I’m sure you won’t regret it, my 
dear. There never was a better mid- 
wife than Mrs. May. Folk in the vil- 
lage say she’s kin to the Good 
Neighbors, she’s so wise. And I can 
help you get things ready for the lit- 
tle one. I.’ve still got baby clothes put 
away in my old dresser. After you 
drink your tea, we’ll have a look.” 

Herbert’s answer, when it came, 
was even angrier than Eithne had 
feared. She was, he wrote, making 
him look like a fool. And she was a 
fool herself, to trust herself to igno- 
rant old women at such a dangerous 
moment of her life. Had she no con- 
ception of the trouble he had gone 
to on her account? He had put him- 
self out to make suitable arrange- 
ments for her; for a momentary 
whim, a wild, unregulated fancy, she 
was willing to upset everything. She 
had never had the proper views of 
what duty in a wife meant. And so 
on for three pages. 


80 

His letter, however, ended on a 
note o£ acquiescence, as Eithne had 
foreseen it would. She fancied he 
might be secretly relieved at being 
spared the discomfort and inconven- 
ience of having her confined at Cor- 
stophinc. She only hoped he would 
not make her pay for the affront to 
his dignity when she did go back. 

Eithne’s child was due at the 
end of January. Just before bedtime 
on the night of the twenty-eighth 
she called Mrs. Neville, saying she 
thought her pains had begun. 

Mrs. Neville went for Mrs. May 
at once. Eithne, left alone in the lit- 
tle cottage with only the oil lamp 
for company, gave way to a moment 
of terrible fear. Herbert was right, 
she was a fool. Women died in child- 
bed, even when they had good doc- 
tors. She had put her life into the 
hands of two ignorant old women. 
Mrs. Neville could not even read. 
What a fool she had been! She was 
almost groaning with fear when 
Mrs. Neville and the midwife came 
back. 

Mrs. May gave her a long, search- 
ing look. Then she smiled. “Take off 
your things, my dear,” she said. “We 
want to wash you. And then, if you 
have a short, loose nightdress, put it 
on. Better no nightdress at all, if 
you’re warm enough.” 

Clumsily Eithne stood up. She was 
shaking with fear. A contraction 
bent her almost double. Mrs. May 
put her arms around her shoulders 
to support her. 

“Nay, you’re doing it wrong,” she 


FANTASY AND SCIENCE FICTION 

said. “You mustn’t try to help it yet, 
my dear. And don’t be afraid. It’s 
natural. You must just open to it, 
like a door.” 

Eithne was undressed and washed. 
Mrs. May sat beside her, holding her 
hand and talking quietly. Gradu- 
ally Eithne’s fear abated. Herbert 
had been wrong, after all, and 
she right. Mrs. May might be igno- 
rant of more than her ABC’s. But 
she was wise. 

About ten o’clock Mrs. May said, 
“Draw a deep breath and hold it, 
my dear. There. Do you feel like 
bearing down a bit?” 

Eithne tried. “Why, that’s better,” 
she said, surprised. 

“Yes, now you can help.” Mrs. 
May smiled. “And scream if you’ve 
a mind to, dear. Some women do.” 

The contractions were coming 
faster. Eithne shook her head. She 
couldn’t spare breath to tell Mrs. 
May the surprising thing she had 
just discovered. But the truth was 
that it was not really pain. 

The baby was born a little after 
one o’clock. Eithne, looking up into 
Mrs. May’s face, saw a strange ex- 
pression, like wind blowing over 
water, pass across it. “Is it all right?” 
she asked anxiously. 

“Yes. It’s a girl. A perfect, beauti- 
ful little girl.” 

The afterbirth had come. Eithne 
held out her tired arms. “Give her 
to me,” she said. 

She was astonished at how much 
she enjoyed motherhood. The baby’s 


EITHNE 


81 


tininess and physical perfection en- 
chanted her. she never wanted to 
let the little thing out of her arms. 
She had been afraid she would not 
be able to suckle her daughter, since 
her breasts were small, but Mrs. Ne- 
ville encouraged her, saying size 
went for naught in a matter like 
that. Eithne tried, and was filled 
with delicious pride when the baby 
throve. The only cloud on her hap- 
piness was the knowledge that she 
would soon have to return to Cor- 
stophine. 

She had written to Herbert a few 
days after her confinement, telling 
him the news. He waited almost two 
weeks to answer, and his letter, 
when it came, was short and cold, 
expressing regret for the child’s sex. 
He said nothing about Eithne’s re- 
turning to the villa. Yet Eithne 
knew that she would have to return. 

The weather stayed bad until early 
in March. Then it cleared. There 
was a feel of spring in the air. Eithne 
went down to the beach with the 
baby. 

she had her lunch and then, since 
little Una seemed hungry, gave her 
the breast. She leaned against a rock, 
drowsy with the relaxation of suck- 
ling, thinking of the story Mrs. Ne- 
ville had told her last night — of how 
some seals are nothing but seals, 
and how others are the true People 
of the Sea, powerful beings who can 
doff their furry skins at will and go 
among land people in the human 
shape. Their number is always the 
same, and if one of them dies his 


skin must be given to another. The 
seals are their loved flocks, and they 
care for them tenderly. 

The baby sank back from the 
breast, satisfied. Eithne buttoned up 
her bodice. She looked out over the 
water. There were no seals at all to- 
day. Wait, though. Far out, almost 
farther than she could see, there was 
one head. 

There was a crunch of footsteps 
over the sand. Eithne turned, star- 
tled. A man was coming toward her 
around one of the points of rock. 

He wore corduroy trousers and a 
jersey, and there was a fishnet over 
his shoulders. He must be a fisher, 
though Eithne, who thought she 
knew every face in the village by 
now, didn’t recognize him. 

“Good day, missis,’’ he said when 
he got nearer. 

“Good day,” Eithne replied se- 
dately. She wasn’t alarmed, though 
Mrs. Neville had said nobody ever 
came to the beach. He had a gentle 
look. 

When he got up to them, the baby 
murmured and crowed. He smiled. 
“So you’ve a little one!” he said, as if 
pleased. “Missis, could I have a look 
at her?” 

Eithne frowned a little. There was 
a strong, sharp smell of the sea about 
him. But she was so proud of her 
baby, she couldn’t resist the tempta- 
tion. “Yes, if you like,” she said. 

He sank down beside them on his 
heels in the sand. Very gently he put 
out a finger and touched the baby’s 
flushed cheek. Her blue eyes opened 


82 

at the contact. She began to gurgle 
and smile. 

“A beautiful baby,” he said. He 
was looking at little Una intently. 
“Yes, missis, a beautiful child.” 

“Thank you,” Eithne answered. 
She was hoping he would not ask to 
hold the baby. She did not want to 
entrust her child to a strange man. 

He got to his feet. “I am glad you 
let me see her,” he said. “Good day, 
missis.” He walked off around the 
other point of rock. 

Eithne gazed after him. She knew 
she had never seen him before, and 
yet she was troubled by a haunting 
sense of familiarity in his bearing. 
After a moment she placed it. It was 
Mrs. May he resembled. He looked 
enough like her to be, not her broth- 
er, but her cousin. Perhaps he was. 
In a small village, it was likely 
enough. 

Three days later Herbert, quite 
unexpectedly, came to Wracksand. 

Eithne was just finishing her 
breakfast when he knocked at the 
cottage door. When she saw who it 
was, she felt the blood leaving her 
face. Had he come to take her . . . 
home, back to Corstophine.'* 

He embraced her, saying, “Good 
morning, my dear,” and then looked 
around the little cottage disparag- 
ingly. “I wish to talk to you,” he 
said. “Is there not some spot where 
we can be by ourselves?” 

Mrs. Neville was peering at them. 
Eithne was loath to take him to the 
little beach, where she had spent so 
many peaceful hours, but she knew 


FANTASY AND SCIENCE FICTION 

of nowhere else. She picked up little 
Una and unwillingly led him down 
to the shore. 

They sat down in the sand. He 
fumbled in his pocket and brought 
out a book. “It is a gift I purchased 
for you,” he said. 

Eithne unwrapped the parcel. It 
was a book of poetry, the same book 
of Matthew Arnold’s, in fact, that 
she already had. Still, he had meant 
it kindly. “Thank you, Herbert,” she 
said. 

“Yes . . . When I saw it, I 
thought of you.” He turned over the 
pages. When he came to “Dover 
Beach” he began to read the poem 
aloud haltingly. . Ah, love, let 
us be true /To one anotherl’ " he 
read. “ ‘For the world, which seems/ 
To lie before us li\e a land of 
dreams, /So various, so beautiful, so 
new,/Hath really neither joy, nor 
love, nor light, /Nor certitude . . 

He closed the book. Eithne waited. 
“I am beginning to think,” he said 
slowly, “that I have not given 
enough . . . heed to love. There are 
other things in life besides duty. 
Yes.” 

Eithne listened in cold surprise. 
She had been gone from Corstophine 
a long time — ^more than five months, 
in fact. Was Herbert trying to tell 
her that he had become interested in 
another woman? Or was this but the 
prelude to more of the dark, obses- 
sive desire with which he had al- 
ways regarded her person ? 

What did it matter? What did she 
care? Now that she was face to face 


IITHNE 


83 


with him again, she realized that the 
spark of feeling she had had toward 
him at the time of their marriage 
had died utterly. She was sorry. He 
had brought her the poetry book. 
But he was less to her than the seals 
out yonder in the water were. 

The baby stirred and woke. She 
gave a hungry wail. Eithne undid 
her dress and began to nurse her. 

Herbert looked on. His lips had 
parted and a shine had come into his 
eyes. Eithne, meeting his glance, felt 
the blood rising hotly in her cheeks. 
No. No. She would not. But he was 
her husband. In the end, she would. 

When the feeding was finished, he 
said, “You spoil the child. Must you 
put her to the breast the moment she 
cries? Even a baby must learn to 
recognize duty and discipline.” 

“She was hungry,” Eithne defend- 
ed feebly. 

“She can learn to wait.” He 
cleared his throat. “There is another 
thing. She must be baptized. I have 
always thought, Eithne, that perhaps 
your own lack of proper awareness 
of a wife’s duties comes from your 
not having been baptized until so 
late in life. I have already selected 
her godparents. And I have chosen 
her name too. She will be called 
Mary Gertrude.” 

"I call her Una,” Eithne said sul- 
lenly. 

“It is not a suitable name. — Eithne, 
you must return to Corstophinc.” 

Eithne’s eyes moved. “I ... I am 
not yet well enough.” 

“Perhaps. But I have consulted Dr. 


Trevin. He informs me that you will 
be quite well enough to resume your 
duties at the end of another week.” 

What did he know about it? 
Eithne thought passionately. Duties! 
Duties! And Herbert’s cold, abrupt 
lust in the dark. He talked of love. 
How she hated . . . But when he 
got up from the beach with an air of 
finality, brushing the sand from his 
knees, she rose obediently and fol- 
lowed him. 

She told her landlady she would 
be leaving on Wednesday week. Mrs. 
Neville nodded, but said nothing. 
Eithne was grateful that she made 
no comment. She couldn’t have 
borne to talk about her going back. 

For the next few days Eithne rose 
early and went down to the beach as 
soon as she had eaten. She sat all day 
looking out expectantly over the wa- 
ter. She seemed to be waiting for 
something — she didn’t know what — 
that became more unlikely with the 
passing of every hour. Sometimes 
she would become conscious of how 
tensely she was waiting, and force 
herself to relax. But always in the 
next moment she would be sitting 
‘upright again, looking out eagerly at 
the seals’ heads and the light on the 
waves. 

Except for her tense waiting, she 
felt perfectly calm. Now that her re- 
turn to Corstophinc was so near, it 
aroused no emotion in her. 

Tuesday came. Dawkins would be 
at Wracksand tomorrow. Eithne 
went to the beach early, but about 


84 


FANTASY AND SCIENCE FICTION 


three in the afternoon she felt a sud- 
den impatience, She would wait no 
longer. It was silly to wait when she 
didn’t even know what she was 
waiting for. 

She packed the things back in the 
lunch basket and picked up her baby. 
Una — Mary Gertrude — gave a sud- 
den wail. Her small face was puck- 
ered with rage. She had been fretful 
and fractious, crying at everything, 
for the last few days, though she 
had been such a good baby before. 

Eithne sat down again and tried 
to comfort her. She was still rocking 
the child and singing when she 
heard a step on the sand. 

It was the fisherman. He was car- 
rying something dark, that looked 
like fur, over his shoulders. The net 
he had carried before was gone. 

Eithne got to her feet. The baby 
had hushed its crying. She said, “It 
was you I was waiting for. But I 
didn’t think you’d come.” 

“Oh, yes. You were right, you see, 
when you thought there was another 
path.” 

“Besides the two human ones? 
What’s it like, underwave?” 

“Cool, green and sliding,” he an- 
swered her with a smile. “Better 
than words.” 

“Better than Mrs. Neville told 
me?” 

“Yes, better than her words.” 

She let out a long breath. Little 
Una stirred. “I can’t leave my baby,” 
Eithne said. 

“Give her to me. Mrs. May said 
she had the signs.” 


He took the child from Eithnc’s 
arms and walked out into the water 
with her. Eithne, looking on, felt a 
moment of the same terrible fear she 
had experienced on the Baby’s birth- 
night. Una would drown, she had 
been mad to trust her to a stranger, 
she— Then her mind steadied and 
she knew, as she had known on the 
night of her confinement, that it was 
all right. When the fisherman came 
back to her, she was sitting quietly 
in the sand. 

He gave her the baby and sat 
down beside her. Salt water was 
dripping from little Una’s clothes 
and hair. But her cheeks were pink, 
and when Eithne cuddled her to her, 
she gave a crow of delight, 

“She can live underwave, then, 
and be happy,” Eithne said. 

“Live, and be very happy,” he an- 
swered in his deep, gentle voice. 

The tide was coming in. Eithne 
looked slantwise at the fisherman. 
She scooped up a handful of sand 
and let it trickle through her fingers. 
Now that so much was opening be- 
fore her, she wanted to delay, to pro- 
long anticipation on the very edge of 
bliss. But at last she got to her feet. 
“I ... we ... I am ready now. 
We’ll come with you,” she said. She 
began to fumble with the buttons of 
her dress. 

He had risen too and stood facing 
her. “Eithne — poor Eithne — don’t 
you understand? You have to 
choose. You cannot both go. There 
is only one skin.” 

She stared at him. She felt a sense 


EITHNE 


85 


of ruin so complete that it seemed to 
her the beach was heaving under her 
feet. Her mind was a kaleidoscope 
of ideas. Herbert — ^her duties — Cor- 
stophine — the baby’s christening — 
discipline — the two paths. Then she 
held the child out to him. She knew 
she would never be able to do it if 
she delayed another moment. “Take 
her,” she said. 

“Goodby, Eithne,” he said gently. 
“She will be happy underwave.” For 
the second time he walked out into 
the sea with Eithne’s child. 

When the water closed over his 
head Eithne realized what she had 
done. She ran wildly out, waist-deep, 
shoulder-deep, pushing against the 
water’s increasing resistance. She 
shrieked Una’s name over and over. 

There was no answer. A little 
wave bobbed lightly into her open 
mouth. Far out on the water, just at 
the edge of the horizon, there was a 
black dot that might have been a 
seal’s head. 


She ran back to the village. Sob- 
bing, exhausted, her hair trailing 
over her shoulders, she told them 
her story. She had fallen asleep, the 
tide had come in, when she woke 
the baby had been gone. Mrs. Ne- 
ville held her close and tried to com- 
fort her. 

She went on weeping. 

She wept when she gave her evi- 
dence at the inquest, she wept when 
Herbert reviled her. (He would get 
a separation, he said, she was no bet- 
ter than a murderess, he would live 
no longer with a female who was so 
irresponsible.) She wept until her 
eyes were almost swollen shut with 
weeping. 

But later, when her tear-blinded 
eyes met Mrs. May’s wise ones, she 
realized that under her bitter grief 
there was a spark of wmething bet- 
ter. She had, after all, been brave 
enough to choose rightly. It was 
Eithne, not Una, she was weeping 
for. 


In this age of tranquilizers, Mrs. Emsbwiller offers a short and grisly 
tale of the perils of tranquil optimism. 


You'll Feel "Fetter . . . 

by CAROL EMSHWILLER 


The Grind y perched on the win- 
dow sill and looked out at the rain 
pouring down. It cocked its head, 
bird-hke, grinned, and then looked 
back at the figure stretched out like 
a corpse on the bed. 

“Nice day,” it said. “Beautiful day. 
It’s raining, but that makes the little 
flowers grow. Besides, I like rain.” 

The shape on the bed rolled over 
and groaned. 

“Seven o’clock,” the Grindy said. 
“Nice time of day, seven.” It half- 
flew, half-jumped down to the bed- 
side table. “You’ll feel better, you 
know, once you get up.” 

“Shut up.” Linno pulled at his 
twisted tunic, and half-opened red- 
rimmed eyes. Something bad, some- 
thing very bad had happened. He 
felt it in his stomach, a hard, hot, 
indigestible knot, the size of an 
apple. 

He squinted at the clock. It was 
only seven, early for him. Yesterday 
he had got up at seven too. Yester- 
day, he thought, yesterday and 
something bad. Then he re- 


membered, closed his eyes and 
groaned again. 

“You were supposed to help,” he 
told the Grindy. 

“I am helping. Everything’s go- 
ing to be just fine. You’ll see. It 
takes a little time, that’s all. You 
mustn’t be impatient.” 

“It’s too late,” Linno slid his legs 
over the side of the bed and sat up. 
“Damn fool Grindy, nobody nee^ 
you any more. Why don’t you take 
off? It’s over. It’s been done.” 

“I’m what the Doctor ordered,” 
the Grindy said. “I’m here to help 
you. You can tell me all about it, 
you know. I won’t tell a soul. I 
couldn’t even if I wanted to. Why 
don’t you just relax and tell me all 
about it? You’ll feel better.” 

Linno rose in an unsteady arc, 
his head hanging forward, his 
shoulders humped up, feet wide to 
steady him. He grunted a short 
syllable of a laugh. “You saw the 
whole thing, the whole bloody 
thing,” he said. 

He limped across the room and 


86 


you’ll feel better . . . 

opened a cupboard door to reveal 
the kitchen unit, an ancient stove 
with food burned black on its sur- 
face, a small freezer unit under it, 
a deep sink to one side with dirty 
dishes in it. 

He turned to the coffeepot, 
opened the lid and stared inside at 
the inch of coffee left in the bottom. 

Then he turned the stove on un- 
der it, went back and sat on the bed. 

“Lousy weather,” he muttered. 
“Damn lousy weather.” 

“Oh, it’s not as bad as all that,” 
the Grindy said cheerfully and 
grinned. 

“That’s what you always say, no 
matter what it is. Even about that 
other you say, ‘It’s not as bad as 
all that.’ ” 

“Of course it isn’t so bad,” the 
Grindy said. “Look on the brighter 
side as I do.” 

“What brighter side is that.^” 

“I’m sure you can find it for your- 
self if you try. Just try, really try, 
and you’ll see. I don’t have to tell 
you.” 

Linno got up again and went to 
get the boiling coffee. He poured 
it into a cup, sipped at it noisily, 
burning his lips and tongue. 

Burning, burning was what he 
deserved, he thought. Only the 
Grindy deserved it too. It was the 
Grindy that woke him up at seven 
yesterday and gave him a chance to 
prepare and get there on time. 

Of course he had told it to do it 
the night before. “Wake me up at 
seven, Grindy,” he had said. “Wake 


87 

me up in time to get to her when 
she’s alone. I’ll show her she can’t 
play games with me,” and the fool 
Grindy had done it. It had made 
possible just what it was supposed 
to help prevent. 

He sipped again and then he put 
the half empty cup down in the 
sink on top of the other dirty dishes. 

“How long are you going to stay 
around.?” He went back to the bed 
and lay down again on his back. 
“Your job’s over. You did just fine. 
Now I wish to god you’d leave me 
alone.” 

“You didn’t go to see Dr, Mor- 
ris yesterday. You went to see that 
girl instead.” The Grindy flew up to 
the ceiling and perched there, upside 
down. “Dr. Morris said I would do 
you good for awhile, make you feel 
better, and that’s what I’m doing. 
Anyway, I can’t leave till Dr. Morris 
tells me to. You know that. Besides, 
am I so bad, really.?” 

“God.” Linno shut his eyes, “You 
were supposed to help and all you 
did was flutter around and say, 
‘That’s fine.’ ” 

“You must remember,” the 
Grindy said, “that most things turn 
out all right in the end. All you have 
to do is wait a bit. The rain goes 
away; the sun comes; that’s the way 
life is. Things arc never as bad as 
they seem in the dark moments. We 
all have our periods of self-doubt 
and despair. It’s perfectly natural. 
But you must reaUze that you’ll feel 
better soon.” 

“I did that thing yesterday. I did 


88 

it but of course I’ll feel better about 
it soon. Things are not so bad. 
I'hey’re just fine, in fact. Just fine.” 

“That’s better.” The Grindy 
walked down the side of the wall to 
the dresser and perched on the edge 
of it. “I’m glad to hear you say it 
that way. We know, you and I, that 
you’re not a bad sort, really, and 
whatever you do, it’s never as bad as 
it seems to you in these low times.” 

“You’re talking about murder,” 
Linno said, “and blood, blood and 
meat, like in a butcher shop.” His 
eyes were slits. “I can’t get it out of 
my mind.” 

The Grindy hopped down to the 
bedside table. “Tell me about it,” it 
said. “It’ll do you good. Why don’t 
you just tell me all about it.” Its 
voice was soothing, hypnotic. 

“I didn’t really want to do it.” Lin- 
no’s face looked blueish against the 
white sheets. “Or perhaps I did then, 
only now I don’t. It’s funny, that 
first part . . . how I killed her . . . 
I don’t even remember. It’s after- 
wards I can’t forget, but there was 
no other way to get rid of the body. 
No other way but to cut it up into 
hams and hocks and shoulder roasts, 
wrap it up, and take it out in the 

“You did all right.” 

“What.'”’ Linno raised himself on 
his elbow and stared at the Grindy. 
“What did you say.?” 

“You did fine. Of course, as you 
say, it was the only way. There was 
nothing else to do, so you did the 
right thing. You sec that too. It was 


FANTASY AND SCIENCE FICTION 

fine and everything is turning out 
for the best, like I said it would.” 

Linno sat up and leaned his face 
close to the Grindy. “I killed her,” he 
said, and banged his fist down inches 
from the bird-like creature. The 
Grindy jumped to the wall above the 
table. 

“Now don’t disparage yourself,” it 
said. “You did the right thing. You 
admit that. You mustn’t tear your- 
self apart like this. Of course we all 
do it sometimes, it’s natural, but you 
must remember that basiaally you’re 
a nice person. Wouldn’t you say 
that? Think about it now, sincerely, 
and don’t be influenced by your 
mood.” 

“Nice! Damn nice!” Linno stood 
up and stretched a hand toward the 
Grindy, but it trotted higher, to the 
edge of the ceiling. 

“I think you really ought to see 
Dr. Morris,” it said. “I’m sure he 
missed you yesterday. Don’t you 
think now would be a good time to 
go? He’ll make you feel better 
about everything.” 

“Yes, he’ll make me feci just fine 
. . . about everything.” Linno stood 
on a chair and leaped for the Grindy 
and then fell to the floor on his 
knees. He got up, looking in each 
corner of the ceiling for the Grindy. 
“You were supposed to make me 
feel better before it happened. Why 
didn’t you? Why? Why?” 

“Shout if you want to,” the Grindy 
said from the top of the closet door, 
“Get it off your chest, that’s the 
thing to do.” 


you’ll feel better . . . 


89 


Linno sat down on the floor and 
leaned his back against the bed. “Get 
it off your chest and forget it,” he 
muttered. “Forget the whole affair.” 

His feet stretched limply in front of 
him, his hands lay palms up. 

The Grindy jumped to the floor. 

Linno kept his eyes on a spot just in 
front of him. 

“I’ve told you,” the Grindy said. 

“All we have to do is wait a bit. The 
rain will stop, the mood will go, and 
you’ll feel better. Everything’s going 
to come out all right.” The Grindy 
hopped closer and Linno turned his 
legs sideways under him. 

“The little blow-off did you good, 

I think.” The Grindy cocked its 
head and grinned. It stepped for- 
ward five small steps into the spot 
where Linno was staring. 

Linno pounced then. There was a 

Look for the July issue of 

F&SF’s new sister magazine, now on sale 

This month’s features: 

JAMES E. GUNN’S "Not So Great an Enemy” — a tale of love and death 
in a world of the future — a world where money bought eternal life, and 
poverty meant slow, terrible death. . . . 

LESTER DEL REY’s "Seat of Judgment” — once every hundred years a 
living goddess was born to the trolls of Sayon — a goddess almost too human 
... too desirable. ... 

TOM GOD’WIN’s "Aces Loaded” — Bull thought the redhead was on his 
side against the gambling combine until he realized that her needle gun 
was aimed at him. . . . 

Plus stories by H. Beam Piper, C. M. Kornbluth, Paul Janvier and Tom 
Godwin — and an exciting new book column by Theodore Sturgeon. 


flurry of hands and wings and the 
boing of a broken spring. 

“Awk,” screamed the Grindy, Just 
once. 

Linno opened his hands and 
dropped the crushed thing on the 
floor, a mixture of cogs and bone, 
wires and blood. He picked up the 
tag from the leg, fallen to one side. 
Ego Builder, B 12-25, Psy. dept., it 
said. 

He kicked at the bird thing. Its 
mouth still seemed to grin. 

“Everything’s not going to be all 
right,” he said. “Everything’s not 
fine.” He got his jacket and went to 
the door. “You made me see that, 
you crazy bird, but you shouldn’t 
grin like that about it.” 

And he went out to the nearest 
police station to tell them about the 
girl in the basket. 


^Recommended fading 

by ANTHONY BOUCHER 


The only marked “trend” so far 
this year is a quite unexpected one: 
the appearance of a surprising num- 
ber of short story collections which 
are unclassifiable yet recognizably all 
in the same category. 

To clarify that paradox: These are 
books which do not make the usual 
category<lassifications of fantasy, sci- 
ence fiction, mystery, crime fiction, 
guignol, “straight” or “mainstream” 
fiction; yet the books have unity, 
within themselves and with each 
other, in the oddness of their tales — 
an oddness best defined by Whit and 
Hallie Burnett as “what happens 
when the night side of the mind 
takes over,” 

So far this year this department 
has reviewed the Burnetts’ 19 tales 
OF terror (Bantam, 35<). Don 
Congdon’s stories for the dead of 
NIGHT (Dell, 35?“) and Robert M. 
Oiates’s the hour after westerly 
(Harcourt, Brace, $3.50) — and one 
might add, as at least closely re- 
lated, Joseph Whitehill’s able baker 
AND OTHERS (Little, Brown-Atlantic, 
$3.75), though its closest approach to 
fantasy is a curious Kafka-like tale of 
not-quite-rcal espionage. 

Now come two more disturbing 


revelations of the night side: Alfred 
Hitchcock’s anthology, stories they 
wouldn't let me do on tv (Simon & 
Schuster, $3.95), and Charles Beau- 
mont’s first collection of his short 
stories, the hunger and other stor- 
ies (Putnam’s, $3.50) — both books 
belonging about equally in a fantasy 
hbrary, a crime library, or a library 
of straight (if off-trail) fiction. 

The Hitchcock collection is almost 
exactly parallel in virtues and de- 
fects, with the Congdon volume — 
which was reviewed here last month 
with the suggestion that it might 
have been retitled most frequently 
REPRINTED TERROR TALES. The StOrieS 
are almost uniformly flawless . . . 
and 16 of the 25 have been previously 
anthologized: Lukjindoo, How Love 
Came to Professor Guildea, The 
Most Dangerous Game, Couching 
at the Door . . . But the volume still 
deserves high marks for generosity 
(over 150,000 words), for the qual- 
ity of its hitherto unreprinted stor- 
ies, which are (particularly a won- 
derful Bradbury) almost on a par 
with the classics, and for the fact 
that even some of the anthologized 
stories are still relatively unfamiliar 
— especially Leonid Andreyev’s The 


RECOMMENDED READING 


91 


Abyss, which is the most (in the 
fullest sense) terrible story I have 
read. 

Even with some first-hand knowl- 
edge of continuity acceptance (net- 
workese for censorship), it’s hard to 
see why some of these stories are 
tabu for TV. I doubt if any public 
medium other than the printed 
word could ever present such stories 
as the Bradbury or the Andreyev 
(and even the printed word may not 
be safe if we don’t firmly resist the 
efforts of today’s many bands of self- 
appointed extra-legal censors') ; but a 
vigorous dosage of at least half the 
stories here wouldn’t do television 
any harm. A minor note of humor is 
that one of these TV-impossibles 
(Margaret St. Clair’s admirable mur- 
der-irony, The Perfectionist) has 
been dramatized on TV, if very 
badly. 

What a reviewer keeps hoping for 
is a collection that is both excellent 
and unhackneyed. The Beaumont 
volume is certainly not hackneyed 
(14 of its 17 stories are new to book 
form, and 7 appear not to have been 
published before even in magazines) 
but its excellence is debatable — at 
least to a Beaumont enthusiast of 
long standing. The size of the vol- 
ume (80,000 words) is partly at fault 
here : Beaumont or his editor has in- 
cluded a few items weak in either 
concept or execution, a story here 
and there that needs just a little more 
work to be a masterpiece . . . and is 
exasperating in its inadequate form. 

But this exasperation is born only 


of the feeling that the first Collected 
Beaumont should have been sensa- 
tionally impressive — and at that, it 
quite probably will be to those who 
read neither F&SF nor Playboy and 
come upon Beaumont’s talents for 
the first time. 

Technically, there are only 4 fan- 
tasies here, including 2 from these 
pages and one {The Crool^ed Man) 
which I could include in a (so far 
extremely slim) Hitchcock-imitation 

called STORIES THEY WOULDN’T LET XtE 
DO IN F&SF. But as with all of the 
books in this night-side genre, the 
general effect, even in the “main- 
stream” fiction, is of an eery uncer- 
tain world of unexpected terrors and 
betrayals. And if the effect is not 
always perfectly sustained, there are 
enough wholly admirable stories 
here to make the book worth every 
reader’s while. 

Close to this new uncategorized 
category is the welcome reprint of 
Isak Dinesen’s 1942 winter’s tales 
(Dell, 35^), part fantasy, part . . . 
well, simply curious, and ever bril- 
liant and beautiful. A newer Euro- 
pean writer of marked interest is 
Use Aichinger, vvhose the bound 
MAN AND OTHER STORIES (Noonday, 
$2.75) reveals her as a sort of con- 
cise Kafka. The not-quite-fantasy 
title story is as striking a narrative 
use of multi-valued symbolism as 
I’ve read in a long time; and the 
other tales (ranging^ through the 
macabre, the supernatural and even 
a strange sort of si.) should delight 
sophisticated palates. 


92 

We return to normally categorized 
books of short stories with James 
Blish’s THE SEEDLING STARS (Gnome, 
$3), which is si. and the survivor 
AND OTHERS by H. P. Lovecraft and 
August Derleth (Arkham, $3), 
which is Weird Tales horror. 

The Blish book collects 5 of his 
stories, ranging from a short to a 
short novel, on “pantropy” — the in- 
terstellar dissemination of the hu- 
man race by genetically adapting 
man to environments in which man- 
as-we-know-him could not survive — 
a concept doubtless familiar to you 
from A Time to Survive (F&SF, 
February, 1956) and the thrice-an- 
thologized Surface Tension, both in- 
cluded here. There are times, partic- 
ularly in the latter story, when Blish 
seems to pass the most remote 
bounds of scientific extrapolation; 
but for most of the book the details 
are worked out in magnificently con- 
vincing manner, to the point where 
the reader knows precisely what it 
is like to be an ammonia-blooded 
citizen of Ganymede, a monkey-like 
treetopdweller on Tellura, a micro- 
scopic pond-swimmer on a planet of 
Tau Ceti . . . and still to be a man. 
It’s a volume nicely illustrating the 
characteristic Blish balance between 
thinking and storytelling, with each 
reinforcing the other. 

“Among the papers of the late H. 
P. Lovecraft,’’ Derleth tells us, “were 
various notes and/or outlines for 
stories which he did not live to 
write. . . . These scattered notes 
were put together by August Der- 


FANTASY AND SCIENCE FICTION 

leth, whose finished stories grown 
from Lovecraft ’s suggested plots are 
offered here as a final collaboration, 
post-mortem.’’ 

In most of these 7 stories (all new 
to book form and 5 unpublished any- 
where), I can’t help feeling that 
H.PX,. knew very well what he was 
doing when he left the outlines un- 
completed. Sometimes the idea is, 
viewed soberly, a little ludicrous; 
sometimes the concept has been 
treated more effectively in some 
other episode of the Canon of 
Cthulhu. Admirers of Solar Pons 
know Derleth’s skill at pastiche; he 
does his best here, but somewhat 
unavailingly . . . until the last story, 
when, with a flash of inspiration, he 
introduces H.P.L. himself as a char- 
acter into one of his unfinished plots 
and produces a warmly moving trib- 
ute of love from one writer to an- 
other which sets a perfect seal upon 
this post-mortem collaboration. 

Fantasy collectors should note the 
availability of a new stock list of the 
publications of Arkham House, My- 
croft & Moran and Stanton & Lee — 
all manifestations of author-editor- 
publisher Derleth. It’s a valuable 
listing of a large number of key 
titles (Arkham was the pioneer 
among semi-professional specialty 
publishers), many of them about to 
go out of print; and the notes and 
comments on the books make the 
pamphlet itself a desirable addition 
to one’s collection. Write to August 
Derleth, Sauk City, Wisconsin — and 
there may be some copies available. 


RECOMMENDED READING 


93 


too, of AUGUST DERLETH ! THIRTY YEARS 

OF WRITING, 1926-1956, a fascinating 
30-page booklet on an all but inex- 
haustible subject. (And how I wish, 
as editor, collector and bibliographer, 
that all authors would prepare such 
booklets on themselves!) 

Philip K. Dick’s first novel solar 
LOTTERY (Ace, 1955; still in print, 
35^) was a very good one — ^and I 
might take this opportunity to re- 
mind librarians that a hardcover edi- 
tion, retitled world of chance, is 
available from England (Rich & 
Cowan, 9 6 d.). Now, after two 

hasty and disappointing efforts, Dick 
easily tops it with his fourth book, 
EYE IN THE SKY (Ace, 35^). This is 
so nicely calculated and adroitly re- 
vealed a work that I’d prefer to say 
little about its plot or even its con- 
cepts; you should read it, and its as- 
sumptions and implications should 
hit you unexpectedly exactly as they 
are planned. I hope it’s enough to 
say that it deals with the alternate- 
universe theme; that I’ve never seen 
that theme handled with greater 
technical dexterity or given more 
psychological meaning; that Dick 
has emphatically come of age as a 
novelist, as well as a technician; and 
that this may very well be the best 
si. novel even of a year which has 
so far produced outstanding books 
by Asimov, Bester and Heinlein. 

Chad Oliver’s the winds of time 
(Doubleday, $2.95) would lend it- 
self all too easily to the type of re- 
view which synopsizes the plot in 
order to prove the book is balder-. 


dash. Indeed, I reread the synopsis 
on my own file<ard and find it a 
little hard to credit that I like the 
book itself as much as I do. I doubt 
if you’ll quite believe the meeting of 
civilizations, across the light-years 
and the millennia, that Oliver de- 
picts; I’m fairly sure you’ll find the 
structure of the book technically im- 
balanced and the solution unsatisfac- 
tory — and not in the deliberate sense 
in which Heinlein first employed 
that phrase. Yet it’s hard to name 
many more purely readable books in 
our field of late. It’s warmly human 
(and, for that matter, warmly alien 
too — which is part of its point), 
nicely observant of our own con- 
temporary culture — in short, Oliver, 
may have goofed in articulating the 
skeleton, but he could hardly have 
fleshed it more attractively. 

[Only look, Chad, you just do 
not, in this day and age, end a book 
with; 

This was not the end. 

This was only the beginning. 
Or am I suffering from an excess 
allergy to corn .? ] 

I could probably make fun of 
Charles R. Long’s the infinite 
BRAIN (Avalon, $2.75) by plot-synop- 
sis; only first I would have to un- 
derstand the plot — a feat approach- 
ing impossibility on one reading. It 
has something to do with a world 
35 light-years away which is identi- 
cal to this one in geography, history, 
language, culture, etc. 99.9% of the 
time, with approximately 0.1% com- 
plete difference; and its action is 


94 

roughly as complicated as the square 
(or even cube) of van Vogt. But the 
fast-cutting montages make for ter- 
rific tempo; suspense is unusually 
high (if often anticlimactic in reso- 
lution); and it’s all lively entertain- 
ment, whether any of it makes 
sense or not. 

Much the same can be said of 
Robert Moore Williams’ doomsday 
EVE (Ace, 35^), which is a story of 
World War III and “the new people,” 
who hope to avert man’s self-de- 
struction by operating through “the 
race mind.” I’ve never encountered 
more unconvincing and inconsistent 
mutants (if such indeed they are: 
the text is contradictory); but they 
engage in fast, vigorous action, with 
some of Williams’ accustomed mysti- 
cism but little of his heaviness. The 
same double-book contains a reprint 
of Eric Frank Russell’s effective pur- 
suit-thriller, THREE TO CONQUER (seri- 
alized as CALL HIM dead). 

Nicholas E. Wyckoff’s the brain- 
tree MISSION (Macmillan, $350) is. 
I’ll venture to guess, the first World- 
of-If story ever sponsored by the 


FANTASY AND SCIENCE FICTION 

Book-of-the-Month Club; and I’m 
curious as to how the Club’s vast 
audience will react to its first en- 
counter with this challenging and 
enchanting genre of fiction. The // 
here is a pretty one: if, in 1770, 
North had conceived and Pitt en- 
dorsed a policy of naming six liber- 
ty-loving American earls to the 
House of Lords, as a prelim- 
inary to arranging the representation 
of American boroughs in the House 
of Commons. 

This is the well-told story of a 
cultivated nobleman’s voyage to 
America to negotiate such a pro- 
posal, and his selection of John 
Adams as the first belted Bostonian 
earl; and I am wholly convinced 
that, in Mr. Wyckofl’s words, “the 
results must have been almost pre- 
cisely those set forth in the tale.” The 
feeling for the truths of history is as 
admirable as the pastiche of Eigh- 
teenth Century prose; and if the au- 
thor has obviously fallen in love- 
across-the-centuries with Abigail 
Adams, he persuades you that such 
a course is inevitable. 


Charles Van Doren’s reign as the Heaviest-W inner-on- Any-Single- 
Quiz-Show was brief; but its effects may, I hope, be lasting. Other 
quiz heroes have been monomaniacs or prodigies; Van Doren won the 
affection (not the awe) of the public partly because — aside from his 
unquestionable personal charm and gambling spirit — he revealed him- 
self as a genuinely cultivated man: no narrow specialist, but a curious 
young man whose wide-ranging intellect had touched upon the 
damnedest things. This ranging curiosity is (as Cyril Kornbluth 
points out earlier in this issue) a characteristic trait of the writing 
profession; and it’s not surprising that Charles Van Doren is begin- 
ning to follow his family's tradition. To date he has published one 
short story (in McCall’s^ and one book, Lincoln’s commando 
(Harper, 1957), a biography of Commander Cushing written in 
collaboration with Ralph J. Roske. To this brief bibliography we now 
add a disturbing vision of a possible, not-too-remote future, "if this 
goes on. . . 


s% 

by CHARLES VAN DOREN 


The man walked with his head 
down, raising it only from time to 
time to check the numbers on the 
buildings. His coat collar was turned 
up; the cheap material was evidently 
not sulBcient protection against the 
cold wind. He kept to the outside 
of the sidewalk, stepping off into the 
street when a party of people passed, 
shoving him. He did not shove back. 
He kept his left hand in his pocket; 
his right hung at his side, blue with 
the cold. 


32, 34, 36 — he turned into the 
large metal doorway, paused 
between the photoelectric cells, and 
entered the opening door. He mut- 
tered his name to the electronic 
secretary in the steel and glass lobby 
and passed through the turnstile, 
continuing down the corridor past 
its rows of doors. He glanced at the 
etched words on the frosted glass: 
manager, sales manager, vice-pres- 
ident. The last door on the right, 
the machine had said. A woman 


95 


96 

passed him, walking quickly. He no- 
ticed that she wore the new Water- 
Pruf shoes. He wondered for a mo- 
ment if he might buy some, but 
remembered that the allowance the 
SRP gave him would never pay their 
rather high price, personnel — last 
door on the right. He stood while 
the door opened, clenching his left 
hand in his pocket, and entered the 
small office. Mr. Watson looked up, 
smiling. 

“Sit down, sit down, Mr. — ” He 
checked with a card on his desk. 
“Yes . . . hm . . . We have your 
letter. A good letter. Now I hope you 
don’t mind if we ask you some 
further questions.” The man nod- 
ded, his eyes on the floor, and Mr. 
Watson began to ask questions in a 
smooth, sure voice. From time to 
time the box on the desk interrupted 
with mechanical announcements. 
“And of course your papers,” he 
ended. The man took them from 
the inside pocket of his coat and 
handed them, trembling, across the 
desk. Mr. Watson examined them, 
his eyebrows raised. “Yes . . . hm 
. . . Everything seems to be in or- 
der.” He checked with the card 
once more, and looked up smiling. 
“We’ll call you. . . . Oh yes, one 
thing of course, before you go — just 
a formality. Your hand.? You’ll show 
me your hand.?” 

The man did not look up from the 
paper-strewn desk at which he had 
been staring during the interview. 
Slowly and unwillingly he drew his 
left hand from his pocket and ex- 


FANTASY AND SCIENCE FICTION 

tended it, palm up, across the desk. 

Tattooed on the palm were the 
letters S R, in green. 

Mr. Watson did not seem surprised. 
“I thought as much. The papers — 
they’re a bad job, you know. It’s 
quite easy to forge papers nowadays. 
I’m aware of that, but it isn’t that 
easy. Now look here, you l{now we 
can’t hire you? You fellows . . . 
Why do you keep on trying? You 
know we always ask to see — ” 

“Yes,” the man mumbled, contin- 
uing to stare at the desk. “I thought 
— It’s just that I haven’t had a job in 
four years. I need a job ... to make 
a new start . . .” His voice trem- 
bled and he stopped speaking. 

Mr. Watson was not angry. He 
leaned forward over the desk. “A 
new start. It isn’t possible, you know. 
The damage is done. Anyway, I 
don’t see why you fellows want 
jobs. You keep coming here, you 
keep coming everywhere. In a way 
I envy you. I mean, not having to 
work.” 

The man said nothing. 

“The Project takes care of you, 
doesn’t it?” Mr. Watson went on. He 
became indignant. “You should be 
grateful. In the Other Country they 
shoot fellows like you. We don’t 
restrain you, you can go anywhere 
you please. We feed you, give you 
clothes, a place to sleep. . . . Why, 
you’ve got a lot to be thankful for!” 
The box on the desk announced 
another appointment, and the man 
rose wearily from his seat and 
walked to the door. “Now I don’t 


S R 


97 


want to see you back here,” Mr. 
Watson said. “There won’t be any 
sense in trying. The machine has 
your picture, you won’t be admitted 
again. I’m sorry,” he added, turning 
to the dictaphone and speaking into 
it. He glanced up. “You know quite 
well . , The man went out of the 
door. 

It was beginning to be dusk in the 
street outside and the cold wind 
blew dust in a swirling cloud around 
him as he turned the corner. He 
shivered, and headed for the neon 
lights that announced an Auto-Snak. 
He sat down at the counter and 
ordered a cup of coffee, leaning for- 
ward to speak into the microphone 
in front of his place. He watched 
without interest while the machine 
collected cup and saucer, poured the 
black liquid, and placed his drink 
before him. “Ten cents,” the speaker 
rasped, and he reached in his pocket 
and fingered a coin, checked to see 
that it was stamped with the regula- 
tion SRP across the Roosevelt, and 
inserted it in the slot. He glanced 
round him and found that he was 
alone at the counter, though in a 
booth two old men were arguing 
about whether the Other Country’s 
latest note had been bellicose or not. 
The man rounded his shoulders and 
withdrew his left hand from his 
pocket and laid it, as though it did 
not belong to him, on the counter 
before him. Slowly he opened the 
fingers until the tattooed letters were 
visible. He moved the fingers of his 
right hand gently over the letters. 


marveling as he had done so many 
times that there was no tactile evi- 
dence that the stigma was there. 
With his lips pressed tightly together, 
a pale line across his face, he con- 
tracted the skin of the palm in an 
unsuccessful attempt to make the 
letters disappear in the folds of skin. 
He could change them to C P by 
bringing the little finger forward 
and cupping the palm slightly, but 
only by closing the hand entirely 
could he make them disappear. He 
replaced the hand in his pocket and, 
having looked around to sec that no 
one had been watching, finished his 
coffee and walked out into the street. 

Lights were beginning to come on 
everywhere as he hurried home. He 
walked in the street, to avoid the 
crowds that filled the sidewalks. A 
single man was likely to be an S R 
these days (though it wasn’t always 
so, of course), and he did not enjoy 
being shoved and hearing the re- 
marks when he passed too close to 
people. He well knew that everyone 
was not as reasonable as Mr. Watson, 
But Personnel Directors were often 
that way, of course, . . . Probably it 
was Government Policy. He stopped 
at the corner and looked down the 
street toward the large Project Build- 
ing. There was the usual crowd of 
rowdies and teenagers in front of it, 
who would push him and yell at 
him as he walked up the steps and 
waited for the doors to open, and 
he thought for a moment of walking 
the streets all night, even in his thin 
clothes. But it was getting toward 


98 

closing time and the crowd was not 
as large as it often was; and not as 
large as it would be at eight o’clock 
when the last stragglers would have 
to run a gantlet of curses and blows. 
He squared his shoulders and 
pushed through the crowd, taking 
the abuse without an answering 
word, and hurried up the stairs into 
his small square room. He sank 
down on the bed and stared at the 
ceiling. He continued to hold his 
left hand clenched into a tight fist 
in his pocket. 

After a few minutes he got off the 
bed and opened the door of the 
small cabinet by the narrow window, 
took down a glass-stoppered bottle, 
and sat down with it at the table. 
The acid smoked when he with- 
drew the stopper, and he hesitated 
for a long moment before upturn- 
ing the bottle and pouring a few 
drops of the heavy liquid into his 
palm. He looked at the clock on the 
wall. He was able to endure the pain 
for ninety seconds before running to 
the sink and washing his hand in 
cold water. He fell wearily on the 
bed, his fist tightly clenched, his 
face drawn in a grimace of pain. 
He lay without moving for some 
time, and then slowly opened his 
hand. There was no disappointment 
on his features when he saw that 
the acid had had no other effect 
than to redden the skin of the palm. 
There would be blisters this time, 
he thought, but the letters were still 
there, a brilliant mocking green. 

He lay back with his eyes closed. 


FANTASY AND SCIENCE FICTION 

listening to the hum of the clock 
and to the cries, faint at this dis- 
tance, of the hecklers in front of the 
door below. He started violently 
when the loudspeaker barked at him, 
and after combing his hair — it was 
required — he trudged wearily down 
the corridor and up the stairs, join- 
ing the slowly moving, silent throng 
that converged on the dining room. 

The meal was soon over, and he 
returned to his room, stopping to 
collect the day’s SRP-stamped nickel, 
dime and quarter from the machine 
by the dining room door. He lay on 
the bed again, his eyes fixed on the 
white ceiling, listening without in- 
terest to the faint sounds his stom- 
ach made in its digestive processes. 

By ten o’clock he could hear no 
more activity anywhere in the build- 
ing. It was the night, he decided. 
He would do it tonight. He pre- 
pared everything carefully. He took 
from the cabinet the large hatchet 
he had bought two weeks before. 
He had saved his allowance to pur- 
chase it (everything metal was ex- 
pensive nowadays). He lit matches 
under the blade until the steel was 
smoked an even gray-blue. It re- 
quired some time to adjust the 
tourniquet around his arm: he used 
a handkerchief, and pointed a pencil 
through the cloth in order to adjust 
the tension. When he was ready he 
sat down at the table, the hatchet in 
his lap, and looked at his hand. The 
green letters stared up at him. He 
dropped his head for a moment. If 
there was anything to wait for, he 


^9 


S R 

would wait. But there was nothing 
. , . nothing. He raised his head and 
pursed his lips, and lifted the hatch- 
et. It did not required a severe blow. 

The pain was at first slight and 
then terrible. He was fascinated by 
the amount of blood. For a while he 
forgot to tighten the tourniquet. 
When he did so the blood slowed 
but did not cease. He began to be 
afraid, and pulled wildly at the 
handkerchief. The blood would not 
stop. He stumbled to the bed, his 
hand over the wound, and before 
fainting jerked at the emergency 
cord on the wall. He heard voices at 
the door and then nothing. 

He awoke in the hospital; from 
his bed he could see the words over 
the door: SECURITY RISK PROJ- 
ECT, and under them amputation 
WARD. A nurse was tending another 
patient three beds away, and the 
man lay quietly, his eyes staring at 
the white ceiling. His hand throbbed 
under the covers, and he moved his 
right hand to touch the bandage. 
He was surprised at the shortness 
of his arm, and then remembered 
what he had done. He felt no horror 
at the act, only a mixture of disgust 
and relief. The nurse in her white 
gown came up to him and adjusted 
the pillows, smiling sourly. But she 
was gentle when she turned him 
over and washed his back, and then 
checked the bandage. “Don’t pick at 
it,” she warned. You’ll start it bleed- 
ing again. We don’t want any more 
trouble out of you.” 


“Was I trouble.?” he muttered. 

“Of course, it’s always trouble,” 
she said, moving to the next bed. 
“You fellows . . .” He turned on 
his side, away from her. He did not 
want to be trouble to anyone. The 
bed on this side was empty, and he 
stared at it for a long time, going to 
sleep and waking again when his 
hand throbbed. The nurse brought 
him a meal and told him he would 
be up the next day. “We haven’t got 
the room,” she complained. “You fel- 
lows, you think we’ve got nothing 
else to do.” But she was careful of 
his hand, and told him before turn- 
ing out the lights (she left one bulb 
burning by the door) to ring if he 
needed a sedative. 

It was in the faint light of this one 
bulb that he discovered (reaching 
behind him to press the buzzer be- 
cause he could not, after all, sleep 
through the pain) the green letters 
on his right palm. S R, they said. 
There was no change. He lay back 
sweating. With difficulty he re- 
strained his desire to cry out at her 
when she came, softly on her rubber 
soles, with the pill and the glass of 
water. After several hours he man- 
aged to sleep. 

The interview with the doctor was 
at three in the afternoon, and the 
nurse helped him to dress. “You can 
do it fine with one hand,” she said 
cheerfully. “Don’t worry, it’s hard at 
first.” He had trouble with the but- 
tons on his shirt, and she had to zip 
his fly while he faintly blushed. 
“Now don’t be afraid,” she said. 


100 

when she felt him tremble, “Doctor 
won’t bite you. It might be different 
if you were the first. But he wants to 
talk to you, to try to make it easier. 
You’ll find it’s much better to coop- 
erate.” She shailed the sour smile 
again, and he left her, shifting his 
arm in its sling. He wondered how 
long he would feel the pain. 

The doctor was signing papers, 
and without looking up motioned 
him to a seat. The man sat down 
wearily, his left arm resting on his 
lap, his right hand clenched in a fist 
in his pocket. The doctor finished, 
“Well!” he said. “We’d hoped, with 
you ... You waited four years. 
We’d hoped that some sort of adjust- 
ment . . .” He stopped. “In a way, 
I suppose — Well, you know, it’s un- 
derstandable. We understand it, you 
know. It’s a terrible punishment. 
But then it’s a terrible crime! And 
this way we don’t have to hate you 
and fear you. The hecklers outside, 
they don’t understand very well, but 
then such people often don’t under- 
stand. Yes. What was your crime, by 
the way.? What did you do.?” He 
looked up curiously. “I don’t have 
your record here.” 

“That’s all right, you don’t have to 
say. I know it’s sometimes hard. But 
would you prefer death.? In the 
Other Country, you know, they 
shoot them, immediately. I think we 
have the better way. And, you know, 
it’s important how the others, how 
we feel. As I say, we don’t have to 
hate you. You’re not martyrs, you 


FANTASY AND SCIENCE FICTION 

can’t be made martyrs of. Oh, I’m 
not accusing you!” He lit a cigarette 
from the lighter on his desk. “It’s 
a difficult question though. I’ve 
thought a good deal about it. I sup- 
pose you have, too. You were a . . . 
what was it.? A lawyer? A profes- 
sor.? Something professional, I seem 
to remember.” 

“Yes. I—” 

“Quite. I understand. I imagine 
it’s not pleasant to think back to 
those days. We don’t want to make 
the punishment any harder than it 
is — and of course the Government 
directive . . .” He drew deeply on 
the cigarette. “You should thank 
God for that Government directive. 
Ten years ago, you know, you were- 
n’t allowed outside the buildings.” 

The man continued to stare at the 
floor, flexing the fingers of his hand 
in his pocket. He was surprised as 
always to discover that the tattoo 
marks could not be felt by his fingers 
as they moved across his palm. 

The doctor went on. “Now we 
hope this won’t happen again. We’ve 
tried to find some rehabilitation 
method, hut without very much suc- 
cess, I’m afraid, so far. We’ve got 
good men working on it. As I said, 
in your case we’d hoped that it 
wouldn’t be necessary. But now , . . 
well, you’ve got only one hand now, 
and you’ll have to find some way of 
adjusting to that. Of course all the 
men here have only one hand — ” He 
stopped when he noticed the puz- 
zled expression on the man’s face, 
“The nurse didn’t tell you that you’d 


S R 


101 


been transferred? But of course you 
were, while you slept. But as I was 
saying, we can offer you an artificial 
hand. Some of them won’t go to the 
trouble of learning to use it. I sup- 
pose they think there’s not much 
point in it, since they can’t work, 
you know. I hope you’ll have a dif- 
ferent attitude. In any case you don’t 
have to decide now, it’ll be some 
time before the . . . stump is strong 
enough.” He coughed quietly. “Now 
is there anything you’d like to 
know?” He smiled faintly. “I’m here 
to answer any questions you might 
have.” He waited, the cigarette burn- 
ing between his fingers. 

“I — ” the man began. “What is . . . 
the next ... ?” He did not look up. 

“The next? How do you mean?” 

“The next — after the hand ... ?” 

“Oh, of course, quite. Now I said 
I hoped that wouldn’t be necessary.” 

“Yes.” 

“Well, of course, I might as well 
tell you. Why, it’s the forehead. The 
forehead.” 

“But . . . I’ve seen ... I haven’t 
seen anyone with — the letters there. 
There are many of them, I haven’t 
seen anyone with the letters on the 
forehead.” 

“No.” The doctor stubbed the cig- 
arette out in the automatic ashtray. 


which whirred and then turned up 
clean again. They can’t bear it. 
They can’t bear that.” 

“You mean, they ... ?” 

“They what?” 

“You mean they cut . . . that ... ?” 

“Yes, quite. Of course. Now if 
you’ll excuse me?” The doctor shuf- 
fled through the papers on his desk. 
He looked up quickly. “I’ve got a lot 
of work to do,” he said, brusquely. 
“I’m sorry. I think it would be better 
if you didn’t go out for a few days. 
Of course we’re not restraining you, 
you can go out if you wish. But I 
know it’s painful.” He delved into 
the papers once more, picked up a 
pen, and began signing them. 

The man rose slowly to his feet 
and moved toward the door. “You 
mean . . . ?” He licked his lips. 
“They cut . . . that . . . ?” The 
doctor nodded without looking up. 
The man glanced at him as he 
passed through the door. The doctor 
had lit another cigarette, and the 
smoke curled up around his bowed 
head, filling the room with a faint 
blue haze, as he scribbled across the 
bottom of the papers. He must not 
have one of the new Micro-Smuthe 
pens, for the point made an unpleas- 
ant scratching sound as it moved 
across the paper. 


THE HORROR STORY SHORTER BY ONE LETTER THAN THE 
SHORTEST HORROR STORY EVER WRITTEN 

The last man on Earth sat alone 
in a room. There was a lock on the 
door. RON SMITH 


One treasures the reliable writers who are always at their characteristic 
best; but one particularly cherishes the surprising ones who have no 
fixed characteristics, the wondrous unclassifiables who never write the 
same kind of story twice, the Avram Davidsons, the Mildred Clinger- 
mans, the Andrew Carves, the Enid Bagnolds . . . and, it would ap- 
pear, the Mary-Carter Robertses. Miss Roberts has recently published 
an extraordinary novel, little brother fate (Farrar, Straus & Cud- 
ahy, 1957), which is a sort of montage of three of the greatest murder 
cases of the 1920’s (and of all time); Snyder-Gray, Loeb-Leopold 
arid Hall-Mills — an uncompromisingly realistic and analytical book, 
in which no one could possibly recognize the author of the following 
fantasy. This is imaginative literature of a kind and quality which I 
have not encountered since the death of Stephen Vincent Benet; his- 
torical American folklore illuminated by warm sympathy, enlivened 
by vivid storytelling and memorable prose; and I hope you’ll agree 
that Jack Smith's is the most powerful encounter with the Devil since 
Dan’ I Webster’s, 


When Jac\ Smith Fought Old Satan 

hy MARY-CARTER ROBERTS 


This story was told me by a minis- 
ter, a venerable man of nationwide 
repute. He heard it from the country 
people among whom he had spent 
his youth. They heard it from their 
forebears, who had repeated it, par- 
ent to child, throughout the century 
that stretched between the happening 
itself (in 1769) and my clerical 
friend’s birth. Many mouths thus 
narrated the tale, and all belonged to 


godly folk. Obviously, the tale is 
true. 

The event took place on that scrap 
of land that makes a false nose, as it 
were, off the southeast corner of 
Pennsylvania, a dwindling protuber- 
ance with its northern half between 
Delaware Bay and Chesapeake and 
its southern between Chesapeake and 
the Atlantic Ocean. This territory is 
composed of one state — Delaware — 


© 1956 by Crotvell-Collier Publishing Co., Inc. 
102 


WHEN JACK SMITH FOUGHT OLD SATAN 


103 


and parts of two others — Maryland 
and Virginia — but with the parts so 
cut off by water from the states’ 
main bodies as to have no geographi- 
cal relationship. In recent years, in- 
deed, people have taken to giving the 
nose a name of its own, bestowing 
a territorial identity on it. They call 
it “Delmarva.” That would not have 
been safe in 1769, for then geography 
was kept in its place, if you under- 
stand what I mean. It was properly 
turned back at state Hnes. A Virgini- 
an in those days would not be taken 
dead for a Marylander or Delaware- 
an, a Marylander for a Delawarean 
or Virginian, or a Delawarean for 
anybody but himself. Delawareans, 
of the three populations, were un- 
doubtedly the most exclusive. They 
still are. My story happened in Dela- 
ware. 

There was this young man, Jack 
Smith, and there was the chapel in 
Bascom’s Woods, and to the country 
people round about it was perfectly 
apparent that something was wrong 
with both. But everyone was used to 
the wrongness of Jack Smith, so the 
greater concern was felt for the chap- 
el. That structure should have been 
the local joy and pride. It was new; 
it had been built by the church mem- 
bers themselves; it was the first 
sacred edifice in those parts; the 
people had done the best they could 
to make it beautiful as well as sturdy; 
they had bought a very fine-toned 
bell to hang in its little steeple — and 
they had never been able to use the 


building at all. This was enough to 
cause any pious congregation plenty 
of distress — while as for Jack Smith, 
he had always been the way he was 
and occasioned no general worry. 
One person alone cared what hap- 
pened to him. 

Jack Smith was the kind of fellow 
ordinary folk would like to laugh at 
— if they dared. His wrongness was 
about practically everything ordinary 
folk take for granted. He was against 
all respected institutions. Nothing 
on earth could induce him to touch 
his forelock to his betters; he did not 
admit he had any betters, though he 
was just a poor freeholder who tilled 
his few acres with his own hands. 

And it was not enough for him to 
refrain from the gesture of deference. 
He would march by the local bar- 
onet with his hat, which he usually 
wore at a sideling angle, squarely on 
top of his head, to make his attitude 
clear. He did not like any gentry, if 
it came to that. He called them Pet 
Cats and said they all lived by lick- 
ing boots bigger than their own, 
composing in this way a social sys- 
tem in which he. Jack Smith, would 
take no part. And since all respecta- 
ble people respected, above all things, 
religion in some form. Jack Smith 
was against religion in all forms. He 
named himself an infidel. Most of the 
time he was quiet, being busy on his 
land, but he carried these wrong- 
headed ideas very close to his sur- 
face, kept them right under his skin, 
as it were, and, with two grogs 
in him to set him off, he would vo- 


104 


FANTASY AND SCIENCE FICTION 


ciferate. People generally took the 
view that he was ridiculous. 

This notwithstanding, there was 
just a single reason — no more — why 
Jack Smith could be despised in his 
own neighborhood with safety; he 
was a minority of one. His mockers 
knew instinctively that they needed 
to be in numbers. Jack Smith had a 
dash about him that spelled danger. 
It kept him from being comfortably 
contemptible. 

He was twenty when these events 
happened, a strongly built bucko, 
black as night as to hair and eye, 
swarthy of skin, comely of feature 
but always scowling, as if he dared 
anyone to say he approved of any- 
thing. We would call him adolescent 
today. In 1769, however, adolescence 
had not gotten recognized. Fifteen 
was a man then, and Jack Smith had 
pushed his maturity still further 
along by going to the wars, or such 
wars as there were. He had fought 
Indians on the frontier and in Cana- 
da and had journeyed as far west as 
the mysterious Ohio River. He had 
seen more of the world than anyone 
in his county and he uninhibitedly 
expressed scorn for the stick-in-the- 
bogs that were his neighbors. Yet it 
was not strange that he had returned. 
He was a Delawarean, and return is 
a Delaware custom. 

People had gathered around him 
when he came back, but not to learn 
where he had been or what he might 
have seen. They just wanted to know 
if he had changed any. When they 
found he had not, but was as wrong- 


headed as ever, they were pleased, 
and then and there began nettling 
him in groups when there was a 
chance for it. 

These chances occurred mostly at 
the Bear’s Claw Tavern, for that was 
where he went oftenest. The other 
drinkers soon had a program laid 
out to use on him. They would wait 
until he was muddled and then over- 
whelm him with their witticisms, 
speaking one after another too fast 
for him to answer. He would finally 
explode, curse until it was frightful, 
and slam out. Then they would all 
laugh, feeling very sure that never, 
under any circumstances, would 
they be so absurd. 

The one person who cared what 
happened to him was always present 
at these shouting matches, but was 
prevented by sex and condition of 
servitude from taking any part. It 
was the bound girl who worked as 
the tavern barmaid. This young per- 
son had been left on the township an 
orphan pauper at the age of six, and 
authorities had bound her out to 
Horeb Potter, the tavern proprietor, 
who had signed articles making him 
responsible for her protection, care 
and Christian education. That meant 
he had put her to work. From day- 
light to dark for the past ten years 
she had drudged on the Potter prop- 
erty, doing everything. But nobody 
thought then that such a life was a 
hardship; so, not knowing she had 
reason to be sorry for herself, Oma 
had space in her to be sorry for oth- 
ers. She was sorry for Jack Smith. 


WHEN JACK SMITH FOUGHT OLD SATAN 


105 


In her eyes he was handsome and 
brave, and certainly superior to his 
tormentors. When she saw him over- 
come by their numbers, she would 
be filled with grieving pity. She was 
a tender-hearted thing, anyway. She 
mothered the graceless Potter brats 
and the chicks in the Potter barn- 
yard, and, until recently, such kind 
occupations had absorbed all her natu- 
ral emotions. Up to the time she saw 
Jack Smith, she had never given a 
thought to men, except to wonder 
occasionally how it was that, in an 
evening of drinking, a dozen of them 
could talk so much and say nothing 
anyone could remember. Now she 
would have liked nothing better 
than to sit in utter silence while Jack 
Smith told her the tale of his adven- 
tures, but she hardly formulated this 
dream, for dreams were outside her 
experience. More practically, she 
longed for something to turn him 
from his dangerous, wicked ways, 
which, she was passionately sure, 
were no true part of him. 

She was a good girl behind the 
bar. She had a light foot, a strong 
wrist, a pretty bosom, and fine, silky, 
golden hair. Nobody gave her a look, 
however — she had no portion, and 
she lacked the forward-coming man- 
ners that some wenches might have 
used to get notice for themselves, be- 
ing modest, seldom lifting her eyes, 
never her voice. She was pious, too. 
She had not been taught to read, but 
she kept her dead mother’s little 
Bible reverently wrapped in a clean 
kerchief, and every night before she 


lay down in the haymow where she 
was sent to sleep, she said her pray- 
ers. Always she prayed for Jack 
Smith. 

He was barely aware of her. When 
he entered the Bear’s Claw, he 
would come swelling with anger at 
his former defeats and thinking only 
of his adversaries and how, this 
evening, he would triumph over 
them. Sometimes, sensibly, he would 
tell himself that the best thing to do 
would be just to ignore the gnats, 
have his drink and go. But that 
never happened. The drink would 
unlock his speech and soon one fa- 
miliar thing would lead to another. 

That was how matters stood when 
knowledge of the wrongness at the 
chapel took hold on people’s minds 
arrd spread first amazement, then 
terror, over the countryside. 

It started at the very opening 
service. The circuit rider was there, 
to dedicate the new House of God, 
and everyone was eager and excited. 
They all came in a throng to the 
Woods and waited until the Rever- 
end arrived, carrying the shining 
key, his good face shining too. He 
unlocked the door. Then he, and all 
the others, as fast as they could 
crowd up and look in, stopped in un- 
believing shock. Everything in the 
beautiful little church had been 
flung into the most shameful dis- 
order. 

The benches were turned over, the 
Communion table too, if such a 
thing can be credited, and the pulpit 


106 

chairs. The hymnals were strewn 
along the aisles. Only the lectern, on 
which lay the Bible, had been left un- 
touched, but right beside it was the 
strangest, most sinister evidence of 
sacrilegious venom in the place: the 
carpet, which had been carefully cut 
to fit the lectern’s foot and then 
nailed smoothly down, had been 
ripped up and flung back all around, 
the tacks still in it. It was as if some- 
one had come so far, meaning to de- 
file the Book itself, and then had 
been afraid and had turned a baffled 
rage on the floor. But all the win- 
dows were found to be securely 
locked, just as the door had been. 
There was no explanation of the 
crime whatever. 

The circuit rider, a doughty war- 
rior for the faith, was used to fron- 
tier rowdyism. He rallied fast. 
Straight in he went, calling for the 
other men to help him, and, blast- 
ing out a strong fighting psalm as he 
worked, began to put things to 
rights. Soon the chapel was once 
again in order. But of course grief 
and horror filled all the people’s 
hearts where there had been hap- 
piness and pride. By then they were 
thinking the harm had been done 
by some debased rufiian who had 
managed to get a false key. That 
thought passed through all their 
minds, that and the hot promise they 
made themselves to find out who the 
scoundrel was and see that he got at 
least a hundred lashes well laid on, 
at the next assize. With this vague 
and miserable theory replacing their 


FANTASY ANP SCIENCE FICTION 

joy, they took their seats. They had 
the dedication service, but, if it had 
been a funeral, it could not have 
been less like the radiant time they 
had expected. 

They had planned, as a climax, 
when the church was finally and 
fully consecrated, to have the bell 
peal out. In this way the building it- 
self, with its own voice, would say 
to God that it belonged to Him, 
while the givers of the gift sat under 
the immaculate roof, listening. To 
make this ritual perfect, the leaders 
had decided against any preliminary 
ringing. They had had reports from 
the foundry of the beauty and mel- 
lowness of the bell’s tone, and while 
hanging the instrument, they had 
tapped the metal and had been de- 
lighted with the musical resonance. 
But not yet had the bell been rung. 

Now the moment approached, 
and a ghost, as it were, of the earlier 
anticipation crept back into the sad- 
dened group. They saw Brother 
More, who had been chosen ringer 
for the first term, rise and tiptoe out, 
and after that they sat keyed up, 
waiting. It seemed that the voice of 
the church, when it sounded, would 
sweep the ugly beginning away. But 
the voice did not sound. Brother 
More came back in, and this time he 
was not tiptoeing. He was walking 
fast and looking very queer. He ad- 
vanced halfway down the aisle, 
stopped, lifted his right hand as if he 
were taking an oath, and addressed 
the minister. “Brother,” he said, “the 
bell won’t ring.” 


WHEN JACK SMITH EOUOHT OLD SATAN 


107 


That was too much. The Reverend 
came down from the pulpit, coattails 
flapping, and every man, woman and 
child stood up. He strode headlong 
toward the door. Everybody, as he 
passed, fell in behind him. They all 
crowded around the doors on either 
side, craning necks, rolling eyes, star- 
ing up into the steeple. They could 
see the rope hanging in its proper 
place, swaying as a result of Brother 
More’s efforts. He was telling the 
preacher that he had felt the bell 
swing, all right, but that no sound 
had followed the swinging. Everyone 
thought the ruffians had either muf- 
fled the tongue or stolen it away. 

The preacher said, “A ladder.” 
They brought one that they had used 
in getting the bell hung. They put it 
in place aivd he started up. As he 
was an old man, some of the younger 
members offered to make the climb 
in his place, but he went on, fast and 
spry. When he came down, he too 
looked queer. The tongue had not 
been removed or muffled, he said. 
It was there, he had taken it in his 
hand and struck it against the bell’s 
side. And no sound whatever had 
resulted. When the people heard this, 
they lost heart in utter bewilderment. 
The men hung their heads, some of 
the women sobbed, and the children 
began to shriek and howl. 

The Reverend did what he could 
to comfort the distracted flock. He 
said he had heard somewhere that 
there were such things as sick bells, 
strange as it seemed. He suggested 
that they send a message to the 


foundry, asking that a bell doctor be 
dispatched to them right away. In 
the meantime, he reminded them, 
they had a church, whereas up to 
then they had had none. They must 
not weaken because of evildoers. Let 
them have the lock changed and 
then, if the mischief went on, let 
them set a watch. 

Those were the things he said, his 
air that of common sense and good 
cheer. But he was far from feeling 
that the words covered the truth of 
the matter. He had a powerful pre- 
monition that something worse than 
bell sickness or mischief-making was 
involved here, and he longed to stay 
with the beleaguered congregation 
and guide it through the danger, 
whatever it might be. But four hun- 
dred miles of rigidly made appoint- 
ments lay before him and he could 
not linger, even for a day. So he rode 
off, promising himself that he would 
make the chapel in Bascom’s Woods 
the first object of his prayers. 

The people followed his advice. 
They had the lock changed and the 
smith who did the job was a chapel 
member. He saw to it that nobody 
got a glimpse of bis work until the 
lock was in the door. As for the key, 
he made just one and for it he fash- 
ioned an iron case with a lock of its 
own, so that only the member to 
whom the sextonship was entrusted 
ever set eyes on the precious object. 
And still the mischief continued. 

There was never again such a 
complete hurly-burly as on the open- 


108 

ing day, but the insults were not the 
less striking for being slighter. The 
people would come in and find a 
pulpit chair upended on the Com- 
munion table. Or the collection bas- 
kets would be filled with rocks. Or 
the cup o£ the Holy Sacrament 
would be standing by the common 
drinking-water bucket. 

As these atrocities made it plain 
that someone had entry to the 
church, even though entry was im- 
possible, the members took the 
preacher’s other direction and set a 
watch. Four farmers with muskets 
stood guard each night for a week. 
All was tranquil and, when the next 
meeting day came, nothing was 
found disturbed. The congregation 
felt better. Some progress, at least, 
was being made. Then, right in the 
middle of the prayer, there was a 
terrible crash and a window burst 
in. Burst in — that is to say, all the 
broken glass fell inside the room- 
But no missile was found to explain 
the breaking — no rock, no chunk, 
nothing. That window had just ex- 
ploded. The people were really 
frightened then. 

They made no effort to remain in 
possession. It was the Devil, they 
said. And terror spread over the 
land. Old Satan lived in Bascom’s 
Woods. You did not have to be an 
ignorant or superstitious person to 
believe it. Educated people had prac- 
tically seen it. The grove was avoid- 
ed even in daylight, and soon other 
stories about it began to circulate. 

Someone remembered an old re- 


FANTASY AND SCIENCE FICTION 

port of how, about a century earlier, 
a passing schoolteacher had asked 
Sir Thomas Bascom, the holder of 
the original patent, to let him have 
some part of the Woods for a free 
school for poor children. But Sir 
Thomas had not considered that the 
poor deserved educating and had 
been additionally affronted by the 
notion that they should have any- 
thing free, and so had profanely re- 
fused. When the suitor had had the 
impertinence to inquire what better 
purpose the land might serve, the 
nobleman had roared, “I’ll let the 
Devil have it first!” and had ordered 
his footmen to give the upstart a 
thrashing. 

Now it appeared that the baron- 
et’s misuse of the Devil’s name had 
marked one of those patiently re- 
curring occasions in human annals 
when the Devil himself had been 
eavesdropping. He had obviously 
taken Sir Thomas up on his impul- 
sive promise. He had accepted the 
gift of Bascom’s Woods. That, any- 
way, was what people said. And, 
dubious as it seemed from some 
points of view, there was this fright- 
ful thing about it — it fit the facts 
and no other explanation did. 

These events tickled the infidel 
Jack Smith immensely. He told him- 
self the godly had been caught in 
their own reasoning at last, and 
were they anything but the poltroons 
their mothers had unfortunately 
borne, they would at least admit it. 
But no — ^not they. They were like a 


WHEN JACK SMITH FOUGHT OLD SATAN 


109 


man standing on a plank that is 
balanced over a crossbar — if they 
took a step in one direction, their 
footing would fly up and smite 
them, because of God. If they moved 
the other way, it would do the same 
thing, because of the Devil. And 
nothing could make them say they 
were not on eternal ground, even 
while their teeth chattered as they 
spoke. 

Jack Smith saw clearly that it was 
the alleged personal irruption of the 
Devil into Delaware that had put the 
issue in so favorable a light from 
the viewpoint of an infidel. As long 
as the godly could settle every philo- 
sophical question in terms of their 
own gab, there was not much a real 
thinker could bring before them. 
They buried it all under saws about 
faith and the Scriptures. But they 
could not bury Old Horny! He had 
already shown them that. One snort 
of sulphur from Horny’s nose, and 
every one of them was on the run, 
whimpering as he went. What a 
spectacle! 

Eating his bachelor supper in his 
snug little farmhouse kitchen, Jack 
Smith chuckled over this out loud. It 
was the funnier to him because, 
himself, he did not believe in the 
Devil — either. The Devil was part of 
church religion, and, as he could not 
accept the church God, neither could 
he the church Adversary. The chapel 
people, as he saw it, had gotten 
trapped in their very first need to put 
their dogma to the proof. And at 
last, he, Jack Smith, could triumph. 


He slapped on his old hat at a 
desperate pitch and started for the 
Bear’s Claw, and for the first part 
of his walk he kept himself warm 
and happy inside by reviewing the 
scathing things he was going to say 
when he arrived. Then he came 
to the branch road that led off to- 
ward Bascom’s Woods. At the sight 
of that, he felt his thoughts change. 
Just who was it, he wondered, that 
was doing the damage out there, 
anyway 

He did not doubt that the reports 
were true. Too many people 
vouched for them. So — who was 
responsible.'* Maybe, thought Jack 
Smith, the really masterly thing for 
him to do would be to catch the 
criminal and refute all this Devil 
possession nonsense by appearing 
with the fellow — a human being, of 
course — in person, taken in the act. 
What a stroke! How would the 
pious look then ? Jack Smith strongly 
inclined to the idea for a minute. 
He stood still, squinting narrow- 
eyed down the road, where already 
the grass was growing, since no- 
body now would put foot on the 
surface, and considered the depre- 
dations. He had decided some time 
earlier that they were committed by 
someone who came down the chim- 
ney. But who.? 

He ran over the list of low county 
characters, as he had it in his mind 
— gamblers, wenchers, sots, petty 
thieves, runaways — and then shook 
his head. None of those men was 
low in a way that would make him 


no 

do anything with a fixed purpose. 
None of them was antireligious eith- 
er; on that subject they were ful- 
somely conformist. Maybe some 
smart bound man, thought Jack 
Smith, articled to a penny-worship- 
ing chapel member and getting even 
the only way he could. Maybe. And 
what would happen to the fellow if 
Jack Smith collared him and dragged 
him in? Well, he might be burned 
in the hand with a red-hot iron. 
Might be put in the pillory — if he 
was lucky. Might be flogged to a 
pulp. Might have his ears cropped. 
Any of those things could happen 
to him. He might be hanged. Sac- 
rilege was serious. Jack Smith 
walked on toward the Bear’s Claw. 

His mood was altered, though. 
His happy malice had left him for a 
somber anger. He still felt able to 
refute the psalm singers, but now 
that the time, at long last, had come, 
he could not feel the enemy worth 
the effort. He entered the tavern, 
walked to the bar and laid down 
his money for a grog. Not more 
than eight seconds passed while he 
was doing this, but everyone in the 
parlor became aware of him. Always 
it was that way with Jack Smith. It 
was his dash. He turned other hu- 
man beings into a crowd — and suf- 
fered accordingly. 

The crowd that evening was all 
men. To be sure, there was one fe- 
male in the room, but she could not 
be thought of as a woman, or even 
as completely human, since she was 
just the bound girl, Oma, washing 


FANTASY AND SCIENCE FICTION 

glasses behind the bar. When she 
observed Jack Smith coming in, she 
felt her heart give a great hard beat. 
When she noticed that he was mo- 
rose and scowling, she felt the same 
organ melt with grief that he should 
ever be other than perfectly happy. 
No one she had seen in her life 
had been perfectly happy, but per- 
fect happiness was what she wanted 
for Jack Smith, and perfect happiness 
for herself would have lain in bring- 
ing perfect happiness to him. She 
loved him. 

He, for once, gave her a little 
attention, though not for her own 
sake. Taking that strange truth in — 
that he no longer needed to struggle 
with the others, that he felt com- 
pletely detached from them — he 
found' himself, in that room with its 
long association of struggle, queerly 
lonely, almost forlorn. So when he 
saw Oma’s kind little face turned 
toward him from the far end of the 
bar, he waved at her, just from emp- 
tiness. “Ah there, sweeting,” he said, 
“You make a poor old man’s eyes 
feel better.” 

Oma’s skin, at that, went from 
milk-white to a glowing, glorious 
red, while her eyes changed from 
still gentleness to the most dazzling 
sparkle. But Jack Smith did not see 
these lovely happenings, because at 
that second Horeb Potter stepped 
between him and the girl. Horeb, 
having heard the rallying speech, 
decided that the guest was in an 
expansive, or spending, mood and 
acted to help things along. He did 


WHEN JACK SMITH FOUGHT OLD SATAN 


111 


what was for him almost unheard 
of. He stood treat. He set a second 
glass down beside Jack Smith’s first, 
and said, “Do me the honor.” 

Surprised but courteous. Jack 
Smith answered, “Your good 
health,” and tossed the liquor off. 
His new detachment ended tlien 
and there. 

He listened to the other men talk- 
ing. They were discussing the chapel 
mystery, of course — nobody in the 
county those days discussed anything 
else — and, unlike Jack Smith earlier 
in the evening, they were not inter- 
ested in who — they knew who. They 
were suggesting methods by which 
the congregation might get the 
building free. 

Cut down the trees, said the 
squire. Make the whole tract open 
ground. The Devil wouldn’t — could- 
n’t — lurk there without cover. 

Hold a great meeting, rejoined the 
schoolmaster. Have a month, six 
weeks, of unbroken gospel feast. 
Services twenty-four hours a day, 
great bonfires all night. If necessary, 
let the brethren put up tents in the 
grove and live there. Crowd the 
Devil out. 

“No, no,” exclaimed a sharp, eag- 
er, breaking-sticks sort of voice then. 
It was the notary. He was a little, 
mean, cowardly man who took great 
pains to be correct in everything he 
did and equal pains to find other 
people guilty of mistakes. He had a 
rat-type face and just now his light 
blue eyes were strangely gleaming. 
“Not by cutting trees or holding 


meetings will we drive the Devil 
from our midst!” he proclaimed. 
“He does not hide in trees, he does 
not fear the godly — the few godly of 
this sinful township. His strength 
is in the hearts of the sinners, and 
we have many, many of those. Let 
us drive the sinners forth, and wc 
will soon see Satan follow.” 

The squire said, politely but a 
trifle crustily, “Sinners.? If you mean 
we are lax in enforcing our laws, 
sir, you are mistaken. We have very 
few unpunished crimes.” 

“True, true!” cried the notary. 
“But how do we punish those 
crimes.? With patience, with long- 
suffering, with mercy. The other 
day I heard of a bound girl in Bethel 
township who had been robbing her 
good mistress, taking the keys while 
her lady napped, opening the cup- 
board and helping herself to sugar. 
What was her punishment.? Six lash- 
es. She should have had three dozen! 
That is what I mean, gentlemen. So 
merciful are we, the wicked creep 
to our county from all over the 
colony, and in every wicked heart 
the Devil finds a shelter. So now he 
too has come.” 

The high fast speech and the blaz- 
ing eyes had their magnetism. The 
others exchanged looks question- 
ingly. Maybe he was right, they 
thought. Something was amiss. They 
had seen the disordered church. 
They had pulled the bell rope and 
gotten only silence. 

“What do you think we should 
do?” asked a freeholder. 


112 

“Revive our good old laws!” cried 
the notary, his voice going still high- 
er. “Burn! Brand! Crop ears! Cut 
off hands! And whip! Whip, whip, 
whip! Make the Devil-shelterers suf- 
fer!” 

“That ain’t the way I fight,” said 
Jack Smith. 

His voice, ordinary in pitch and 
disgusted in tone, swept the notary’s 
magnetic moment quite away. Once 
more Jack Smith was the chief man 
present. Once more the others were 
a crowd. And the notary, from a 
peak of leadership, felt reduced to 
the crowd’s least significant mem- 
ber, so that in his heart he bled, 
though outwardly he looked as 
bloodless as a little rock. The school- 
master said affably, “We wouldn’t 
expect you to fight the being we are 
talking of. Master Smith, I assure 
you.” 

“I don’t care what you expect,” 
said Jack Smith. 

“To an infidel, his presence is 
probably welcome,” continued the 
schoolmaster, and now a faint note 
of hysteria edged A is voice, although 
he usually had good control of him- 
self. 

Jack Smith answered, “To (Ais 
infidel, his presence hasn’t even been 
visible. I don’t belong to your chapel. 
So I don’t care. But here’s what I 
just heard you people saying. There’s 
a hundred and fifty men that do 
belong, and there’s one old Devil. 
And the only way you men can 
figure to lick that Devil is to beat 
a poor bound girl that ate some 


FANTASY AND SCIENCE FICTION 

sugar. My remark was — I don’t fight 
that way. You can take it or leave it. 
I don’t care.” 

It is unnecessary to give in full the 
charges and countercharges that 
were then hurled back and forth 
across the Bear’s Claw parlor. Suf- 
fice it to report two points — first. 
Jack Smith made it perfectly clear 
that he did not believe in the Devil, 
thereby shocking his hearers far 
more than when he had denied be- 
lieving in God; and second, the 
notary, fairly screeching, invited 
Jack Smith to walk through Bas- 
com’s Woods that very night, and 
Jack Smith accepted. 

He not only accepted. He put a lit- 
tle flourish on it. He said, “I’ll walk 
through the Woods, though it ain’t 
on my way home, if I sec Old 
Satan, and he’s civil to me. I’ll be 
civil too. But if he interferes with 
me. I’ll fight him. He won’t see me 
turn and run, like a chapel lad.” 

He got that far in his speech and 
saw young Oma’s eyes fixed on 
him — her wonderful, new, blazing, 
big blue eyes, frankly adoring. Well, 
he thought. And went on to his 
flourish. 

“I’ll fight him any way he likes,” 
he announced. “The fancy. Rassle. 
Rough-and-tumble, bite and gouge. 
Canuck. Injun. Any style.” And, as 
he listed the items of his prowess, he 
gave a demonstration with each one. 

Saying “The fancy,” he whirled 
his fists through a sequence of jabs 
and punches that had the distinc- 
tion, at least, of being very fast. 


WHEN JACK SMITH FOUGHT OLD SATAN 


113 


Saying “Rassle,” he hooked an el- 
bow under an imaginary adversary’s 
chin and pressed back until the 
watchers fairly heard the bones 
crack. Saying “Rough-and-tumble, 
bite and gouge,” he removed another 
adversary’s eyeballs with a graphic 
sweep of his thumbs and bared his 
hard, white, handsome teeth in some 
ferocious grimaces. 

At “Canuck,” he simply gave a 
kick; it was too fast for the spec- 
tators to make anything of it. But at 
“Injun,” he performed his master- 
piece. For then he took on a strange, 
wild, mysterious expression, bent 
over forward from his hips until he 
was the shape of a right angle, 
bounded into the air and after that 
circled the parlor three or four 
times, seeming just to float, for when 
he put a foot down he did so with- 
out making a particle of sound or 
even vibration. It was a passage 
from the Huron war dance, and, as 
its climax, called for a war whoop, 
which Jack Smith faithfully sup- 
plied. 

Then he laughed with the utmost 
gaiety, hurled on his old hat, opened 
the door and went out. The second 
he was standing on the step alone, 
he stopped, gathered himself and 
took a standing broad jump that 
shot him halfway across the road. 
He thought he had not felt so good 
in a long time, but he did not as- 
sociate this goodness with anyone’s 
beautiful eyes. He had forgotten the 
bound girl and was dehghtfully ab- 
sorbed in himself. 


She, behind the bar, was praying 
for him with all the terror of her 
loving heart. He was going into 
Bascom’s Woods! “O God, help 
him!” she whispered, while she 
washed glass after glass. And then 
she remembered the wicked, unre- 
ligious things he had said, and won- 
dered in new fear if God could 
forgive such speech. God, as she had 
had Him described to her, was dis- 
tinctly a Lord of Vengeance. Where 
any mercy entered into her concept 
of the Divine make-up, it was by 
her own involuntary amendment — 
involuntary because she could not 
long imagine anything without some 
kindness in it. Now she hopefully 
laid hold of the idea that the Om- 
nipotent might be propitiated by a 
scapegoat and hastened to offer one. 
“Punish me in his place,” she im- 
plored. “Punish me — but help him, 
please, oh, please!” Jack Smith had 
said he did not fight that way. . , . 

He marched rapidly along and 
turned into the road to the Woods 
without a worry. He genuinely did 
not beheve the Devil existed. He had 
no fear of anything supernatural. 
However, when he rounded the 
bend that let him see the Woods’s 
front — a mile-long stretch of un- 
broken heavy timber — he thought 
that, since it was a dark night, he 
might better be wearing his pistol. 
He could run into human interfer- 
ence, if not diabolical. But who 
would try to rob him? He was 
known to be a poor man who never 


114 

had anything but a few shillings for 
his drink. He went on. He entered 
the Woods. Then he was reminded, 
out of his frontier experience, of 
what forest darkness could be. No 
moon, no stars and a thick canopy of 
heavy-leafed branches overhead. See 
the Devil in there — the Devil, who 
was reputed to be black? See black 
— against black? Jack Smith grinned. 
He might pass within two feet of 
Old Satan and never know Satan 
was there. 

He was wrong about that. He saw 
Old Satan when he had penetrated 
the Woods about half a mile, and 
what he saw was precisely a silhou- 
ette. Old Satan showed up — blac }{ — 
against his black surroundings. He 
really did. The reason was — Old 
Satan was so much hlac\er. 

He was sitting on the ground be- 
side the path, facing toward Jack 
Smith. Jack Smith saw his horns 
curving up on the sides of his head, 
saw his long pointed ears, saw a pair 
of high shoulders and what seemed 
to be the sides of a pretty long 
torso, and that was all he could 
make out. He had an impression, 
however, that Old Satan had his 
knees lifted and was clasping them 
with his arms. It was Jack Smith’s 
woodsman’s eye that took all this 
in, an eye that worked far faster than 
human thought. So Jack Smith had 
seen the Devil, had recognized him 
and catalogued his points before the 
awful conclusion arrived — Old Satan 
was real! There he was! 

Jack Smith stood still. He had 


FANTASY AND SCIENCE FICTION 

been an orphan since he could re- 
member and in consequence was 
used to feeling himself alone — alone 
and deprived of something all other 
people had. This accustomedness 
was a good thing for him now, for 
in that moment he felt alone in- 
deed. Alone, alone, alone. Old Satan 
was real? Then he. Jack Smith, had 
been wrong in everything that had 
seemed right to him. It was a great 
deal to take in without warning. 
He went on standing still. 

Old Satan spoke first. He said, 
“Jack Smith.” His voice was light, a 
little wooden and not in the least 
terrifying. 

Jack Smith replied, “My name.” 

“I hear you want to fight,” Satan 
continued, without making a move. 

“Well, then, come on and fight,” 
Jack Smith replied, himself unmov- 
ing. 

Something switched across the 
path in front of his feet, something 
like a big and very fast snake. It 
made several heavy wriggles, 
straightened out and was still. It was 
the Devil’s tail. Jack Smith knew 
this without understanding how. 

“Step over it,” invited Old Satan. 

“Horns,” said Jack Smith, “and a 
long tail too. You damned old cow.” 

He took a very short step forward 
and aimed a hard kick. With all the 
blackness, he miscalculated, and that 
was lucky for him, for, had he 
landed his foot as he intended, he 
would have broken every foot bone 
he had. He grazed the tail as it was, 
and the mere touch was enough to 


WHEN JACK SMITH FOUGHT OLD SATAN 


115 


tell him that, despite its limberness 
a few seconds before, it was now 
like a bar of iron. 

“You fight hind-part-to?” Jack 
Smith inquired. 

He then saw a change in Old 
Satan’s silhouetted head. At the tip 
of each horn there appeared a very, 
very short pointed flame. These were 
pale green. The next thing Jack 
Smith knew, the Devil was up and 
charging. 

The green flames were racing to- 
ward him, and they were at about 
the level of his belly. Evidently Old 
Satan was meaning to gore him. 
His herd bull had meant to do that 
same thing two weeks earlier, when 
it caught him in close quarters in 
the feed lot. Jack Smith acted now 
as he had acted then. He made no 
attempt to dodge, but threw his 
whole weight forward against the 
oncoming Devil, grabbing the horns, 
shoving down and then twisting 
hard. He doubted Satan’s neck was 
stronger than the bull’s, and he knew 
that even a neck of great power is 
not much good if yanked out of line. 

His calculations seemed to be 
right. He soon had Satan looking 
over his own shoulder, while Satan’s 
feet scrabbled hard to keep planted, 
the sound reminding Jack Smith 
that those feet were hoofs. A few 
yanks more, he thought, and bones 
should crack. It seemed too easy, and 
it was. Jack Smith was next aware 
that something was funny about his 
arms. 

They were numb. They were 


heavy. They were almost like dead 
— what on earth? Then Jack Smith 
realized — his hands, wrists and fore- 
arms were terribly cold. He could 
not feel a thing with them; he was 
keeping his grip just by bringing 
his weight down, but the weight 
traveled along his arms as if they 
were sticks. The reason was that 
the little flames in the tips of Satan’s 
horns were licking Jack Smith’s 
flesh and spreading this frozen tor- 
por. 

In the nick of time Jack Smith 
let go, forcing his fingers to loosen 
by sheer will power. Then he sprang 
aside, anticipating another charge, 
but Old Satan stopped to rub and 
feel his neck. He straightened up 
and Jack Smith saw he was about 
seven feet tall, a foot taller than he 
was himself. 

Jack Smith spoke. “Put ’em out,” 
he said, and waggled his fingers over 
his own brow, to indicate that it 
was the horns he was referring to. 

Satan answered, “Why don’t you 
do that?” 

“I will,” said Jack Smith. And 
spat. Once, twice. The green flames 
disappeared. 

And Satan, it seemed, could bear 
this peculiarly abominable insult 
no better than a man, for he made 
an angry noise, a sound like that of 
a teakettle boiling over on a hot 
stove, and then came on in a rush. 
This time he did not undertake to 
gore, but minced up, dancing and 
prancing, his fists lifted, his chin in, 
his shoulders weaving and bobbing. 


116 

all in the smartest style of the fancy. 

Now although earlier that eve- 
ning Jack Smith had given so flashy 
an exhibition of his skill in box 
fighting, he really had no wish to 
engage in any such bout, for the 
truth was he knew little of the 
method. Also, he believed that, in 
meeting any attack, it was healthy 
to introduce an element of surprise. 
So he met Old Satan’s scientific pu- 
gilism with a wild, savage trick 
right out of the American woods, 
the vicious French-Canadian lash, 
the kick that kills. It is delivered 
without warning; it travels like light- 
ning, or anyway faster than human 
sight can go; it is aimed at the 
victim’s chin; and, ideally, it breaks 
both jaw and neck. Ideally also, of 
course, it is performed by a foot 
cased in the French-Canadian log- 
ger’s spiked and cleated boot. Jack 
Smith was wearing no such gear — 
only a Delaware farmer’s shoe, light- 
ly armed with a toe of copper. 

But he did have the speed and 
muscle. He kicked his demonic en- 
emy as if he were a demon himself. 
He flashed his leg up as if there had 
been no such thing as gravitation. 
His foot traveled like a weight on 
the end of a rope that is swinging 
down, gaining speed and force, not 
losing it, longing for the climax of 
its arc when it should crash against 
its target. It was a magnificent lash. 

One thing, however, went against 
its success. That was the pilch dark- 
ness. (The Canucks seldom lashed 
in the dark themselves; barrooms 


FANTASY AND SCIENCE FICTION 

and torch-lighted camps were their 
sites for this kind of battle; in the 
dark they simply stabbed.) So Jack 
Smith failed of his target, though 
not by a complete miss. His shoe 
scraped Old Satan’s cheek and tore 
one of his long ears. It brought 
blood. Jack Smith could see that — 
pale-green blood, the color of those 
flames, seeped out of one side of 
Satan’s head and ran onto his shoul- 
der. It did not shine in the dark, 
but it was brightly visible. It painted 
the ragged edge of the ear that had 
been torn — no thicker than a mem- 
brane — against the air behind it. 

Old Satan did not resume his fancy 
fighting. He took a new attitude, out 
of which Jack Smith could at first 
make nothing. Slightly, just slightly, 
Satan bent his body and every one 
of his limbs, spreading the limbs 
abroad, holding his elbows out from 
his sides, taking a wide-planted 
stance on his hoofs. Then he pulled 
in his neck, so that his head seemed 
to be right on his shoulders, sticking 
a little forward. In this position he 
looked like just one thing, and Jack 
Smith recognized that thing for 
what it was, at last. 

Ever since he had first glimpsed 
Satan sitting there beside the path, 
he had been wild in one quarter of 
his mind because there was nothing 
for him to liken his adversary to. 
Old Satan was not like a man, 
despite having human speech, erect 
posture, hands and the general out- 
line of a man’s body. He was not 
like a field beast— horns, hoofs, ears 


WHEN JACK SJMITH FOUGHT OLD SATAN 


117 


and tail notwithstanding. But those 
were the only creatures that he could 
reasonably be compared to, since they 
were the only ones whose properties 
he shared. Now Jack Smith saw 
the real likeness of him and that 
turned him sick, for it was the one 
member of the animal kingdom that 
Jack Smith simply could not abide — 
not in sight, in thought, or in memo- 
ry — the spider. Hunching there in 
the midst of his curved limbs. Old 
Satan was spiderUke and nothing 
else. Jack Smith even had an idea 
that Satan was not standing on his 
hoofs at all, but was hanging from a 
thread of web. And Jack Smith’s 
stomach went clear over. 

In this horrible second. Old Satan 
addressed him with a sentence of 
austere rebuke. He said, “You do not 
fight fair.” 

Spinning through Jack Smith’s al- 
ready spinning mind went the an- 
swer he might make: “I don’t take it 
out of the backs of bound men and 
girls, either.” For at that second, at 
the sight of his lifelong, inborn 
dread and hate — the insect murderer 
— so magnified, so black against pure 
blackness. Jack Smith felt all his 
hates come together. And Old Satan, 
hanging there, was not just a spider 
in his eyes but was smugness and 
hypocrites, and aristocracy and cow- 
ards; and no-justice-for-the-poor; 
and the agonies of branding iron, 
pillory and gibbet; and the tears of 
all the hopeless people — ^and of Httle 
orphan boys too. The whole sum of 
the bitter emotions that had kept 


Jack Smith from ever being a petter 
of Pet Cats, and had made him Jack 
Smith, infidel, blazed up in him, 
directed against the dangler opposite. 

And if, previously, he had been 
accepting his battle with Old Satan 
as a fight between, at least, two male 
beings, he no longer did. He could 
not conceive that Old Satan had 
even the single warm attribute of 
sex. Sex was the means by which 
men changed, giving life to new 
men, sons to come after them — and 
Satan did not change. He was always 
the same and he had always been 
there — the same — for every man who 
had drawn breath. The Old One. 
Jack Smith did not try to put any 
of this clot of concepts into lucid 
words. He just roared, “And serve 
you right!” and gathered himself 
for what might come next. 

Then Satan leaped. Still keeping 
his spread-out posture, he sailed 
through the black air that was be- 
tween him and Jack Smith. He 
landed hard, chest to chest, and they 
went down. Jack Smith of course 
being underneath. Satan at once en- 
wrapped him, using arms, legs and 
tail as well. 

Then it was rough-and-tumble, 
nothing else. They kneed, clawed, 
ground, choked and hammered. 
Jack Smith did not remain under- 
neath, but neither could he remain 
on top. He and Satan rolled, thrash- 
ing over a wide expanse. Sometimes 
they spun fast, each contriving to 
defeat the other’s tactic as soon as it 
was applied. Sometimes they lay. 


118 

seemingly still, for moments, meas- 
uring each other’s strength, each 
gathering his own resources. This 
went on a long time, and all of that 
time the two were in a close em- 
brace, body against body, sometimes 
face against face. Jack Smith in this 
manner got an intimate comprehen- 
sion of what Old Satan’s physical 
being was. 

Spiderlike, indeed. Old Satan was 
neither warm, as a man would be, 
nor cold, as a fish or lizard. He was 
just a trifle coldish — and utterly dry. 
And he was a prober and sucker in 
every particle of him. He was com- 
pletely covered. Jack Smith found 
out, with very, very short thick fur, 
and each hair of this coat had a life 
of its own — which was to probe and 
suck. Wherever a surface of Old 
Satan came in contact with a bare 
surface of Jack Smith, the satanic 
surface took hold. Each separate hair 
on it wriggled to investigate Jack 
Smith’s skin and, having satisfied 
itself tliat way, went to work, fasten- 
ing its tip down, sucking. So that 
Jack Smith, as well as his mighty 
battle with the spider that was seven 
feet high, had also these thousands of 
infinitesimal, eager indecencies to 
madden him. Ghastly as they were, 
they helped him, in a way. They 
kept him from sinking into routine, 
either physical or mental. They gave 
him the spur of horror. He fought 
like one inspired, inventing and ap- 
plying new tricks without being 
aware of it, driven to brilliance by 
desperation. Just to get away from 


FANTASY AND SCIENCE FICTION 

the feel of Satan — that was the whole 
of his state of mind in this passage 
of the fight. 

And yet, frantic as he was, he 
forbore to use one well-proved, ef- 
fective trick, forbore again and 
again, for he had repeated chances. 
That was the bite. He would, in 
need, have taken a beast-devil’s ear 
or even tail in his teeth. He would 
have taken a man-devil’s hand or 
sinew. But the hairy, temperature- 
less anatomy of a spider! Jack Smith 
fought this part of his fight with his 
jaws clenched and his lips pressed 
together too. 

However, if the bite was omitted 
from consideration, not so was the 
gouge. Jack Smith presently fixed 
his mind on gouging as the best 
method of getting free, could he but 
attain the necessary position. The 
gouge, very simply, consisted in re- 
moving an opponent’s eyes. It was 
quick, requiring only a few seconds 
to achieve its purpose. It was eco- 
nomical of effort, for it called for no 
strength. It might kill an adversary 
or it might not, but that was un- 
important. It would end a fight. 

At long last Jack Smith got his 
opportunity. He found himself on 
top with his forearms free and above 
his head. The position could change 
in a second — Old Satan was trying, 
with both his arms, to heave Jack 
Smith off his chest, while with his 
thick, coldish tail he was tearing at 
Jack Smith’s leg hold, sometimes 
latching on and pulling, as if the 
tail had been a cable, sometimes 


WHEN JACK SMITH fOUGHT OLD SATAN 


119 


flailing, as if with a whip. So Jack 
Smith acted fast. He felt over Satan’s 
face to the spots where the eyes 
should be (up to then he had seen 
no light come from Satan’s counten- 
ance, nothing except the pale-green 
fire and blood) and, finding the eyes 
in the normal places, though covered 
with furry lids, he instantly set his 
thumbs. 

The technique then was to push 
down, driving the eyeballs back in 
the skull a certain distance. After 
which, the thumbs should be bent 
at the first joint and the direction of 
the push changed — from down to 
outward. By this very simple se- 
quence of motions, if all went well, 
the eyes would be scooped forth. It 
was an old method of human com- 
bat, descending from the Ncander- 
thalers by way of the Greeks, Rom- 
ans and European mercenary armies 
to the American frontier, where it 
had been well established for a cen- 
tury. Jack Smith was perfectly fa- 
miliar with it. He proceeded cor- 
rectly. He drove his thumbs down, 
Satan’s furry eyelids being under 
them. 

What happened next was that Jack 
Smith’s thumbs went on an unex- 
pected distance. For Satan’s eyes did 
not wait to be pushed in; they with- 
drew, as it were, before the pushers, 
retired of their own accord, and 
left Jack Smith’s thumbs sticking 
down in Old Satan’s skull in seem- 
ing vacancy. For a few seconds. 
Then Jack Smith realized what was 
happening. His thumbs were freez- 


ing and the cold was crawling up 
his wrists and forearms. It was the 
same cold as had struck him from 
the flames in the horns, and it acted 
the same way, of course. It was so 
terrible that it numbed without 
warning. Jack Smith’s hands were 
half paralyzed before he even felt a 
chill. He jerked his thumbs out with 
a yell and, in the whole horror that 
he felt, he let go of Old Satan com- 
pletely and sprang to his feet and 
rushed back three or four yards. 

Old Satan in no way interfered 
with this. He sat up himself, taking 
the easy attitude in which he had 
been resting when Jack Smith first 
saw him. For a second, no more, he 
allowed Jack Smith to see his eyes — 
two pale-green slits — as if to inform 
him that they were uninjured. Then 
he patted the ground in front of him 
with the end of his tail, giving a 
gentle thump. That was all he did. 

And Jack Smith, standing still and 
breathing loud, feeling the life creep, 
with an agony as of death, back into 
his hands, but also feeling, on every 
particle of his exposed skin, the 
loathsome memory of the hairy vi- 
olations, vivid and crawling and vit- 
al — Jack Smith, at this point, de- 
cided to finish this fight Injun. Injun 
style was clean. There was no hug- 
ging and rubbing in it. There was 
no contact at all, up to the last 
moment. So the Injun fight would 
be his method from now on. He was 
a master Injun fighter. 

There had been one whole sum- 
mer in the north woods when he 


120 

had fooled some bands of Huron 
trackers who, themselves, were re- 
liably reported to fool the Devil 
daily. So it would take a smart In- 
jun to fool Jack Smith — a smarter 
one than had yet lived to brag of it 
— and a smart devil too. Having 
laid this plan. Jack Smith vanished. 

He had been standing by a tree 
and he became part of the tree trunk. 
How? You could not say he stepped. 
He glided, maybe. Or drifted. Or 
dissolved and floated, if you choose. 

Best to say. Jack Smith just was 
gone. He had been in one place, and 
then he was not in that place, nor 
had he moved to any other, so far as 
a watching eye could see. Such was 
the essence of the Injun stalk. 

Jack Smith loved this way of fight- 
ing. As soon as he decided to use it, 
he underwent that wonderful change 
that he had had earlier in the Bear’s 
Claw Tavern — he ceased to be a 
Delaware farmer; he became the 
free, gleeful, savage child that was 
bred of the American wilderness. 
He was an Injun. 

That meant he was the trees, the 
undergrowth, the air. He was Bas- 
com’s Woods as well as was in it, 
for he drew it all into himself, call- 
ing on the sub- and supersensory 
faculties that men in breeches never 
know they have. 

This was the way to fight! For 
this was the primitive essence of the 
fight — fight and hunt combined — 
and the sublimation, since it was 
fight on a mental plane, mind against 
mind, no other force involved. Well, 


FANTASY AND SCIENCE FICTION 

that did not leave him much to fear, 
Jack Smith thought, grinning. Old 
Satan was no Injun fighter. Jack 
Smith, after he blended into that 
tree, never had Old Satan out of his 
sight (though he never came in line 
of Satan’s vision either) and he could 
easily perceive that Satan knew not 
the first thing about the stalk. Old 
Satan showed a really pitiable ignor- 
ance. 

He first cocked his horned head 
at the tree into which Jack Smith 
seemed to have entered, telling him- 
self, practically out loud, that, as 
Jack Smith must have gone behind 
the tree, he would have to come out 
from behind it sooner or later. When 
this did not happen, Old Satan got 
up and walked around. He did not 
leave the comparatively clear space 
in which they had done the rough- 
and-tumble, and it was apparent to 
the watching Jack Smith that he was 
uneasy, for twice he whirled sud- 
denly around, fists lifted, evidently 
expecting Jack Smith to be creeping 
up behind. Finally he sat down 
again, but remained edgy; Jack 
Smith could tell that by his tail, 
which swftched back and forth in 
nervous short arcs. Jack Smith, in the 
meantime, was never more than 
fifty feet away. His plan was to get 
Old Satan completely baffled, but not 
give him time to conclude that his 
opponent had run off, and then 
come in and cut Old Satan’s throat. 

His weapon for the blow was not 
much. It was a little clasp knife that 
he carried in his pocket. It had a 


WHEN JACK SMITH FOUGHT OLD SATAN 


121 


single blade and that was no more 
than two inches long. It was razor- 
sharp, however, and two inches, if 
applied accurately and fast, would 
be enough to split the big vein that 
was in any neck that was a neck at 
all, human or devilish. Jack Smith, 
gliding through the pitch darkness 
and seeming to be part of it, felt 
calmly sure of himself. He pro- 
longed the stalk about ten minutes 
and then closed in. 

He came across the little clear 
space that was between him and 
Old Satan, as silent as a cloud. He 
got up to Satan’s back. The tail, 
switching its little arcs, was laid on 
the ground to Satan’s right. That 
was a good thing. Jack Smith aimed 
to strike on the left — the vein was 
there. He struck. He drove his blade 
in its full length, stabbing Satan’s 
neck just about under the left ear 
and then dragging hard toward the 
front. The vein parted. Jack Smith 
knew this because at once the pale- 
green blood spurted up, looking like 
the jet of a fat fountain; but Jack 
Smith could not stop. So violent 
was his hatred, he dragged on and 
achieved a half decapitation. Then 
Old Satan’s head clunked down on 
his chest and Jack Smith quit cut- 
ting because he had to. He took his 
fingers from the knife handle, leav- 
ing the blade in the gash, and started 
to rise up to expel the great 
“Ah-h-h!” of victory. The “Ah-h-h” 
did not follow. 

Instantly, before he got his back 
straight, he was thrown into a frenzy 


by Old Satan’s blood. It had 
drenched his hand, wrist and sleeve, 
and now he felt it act precisely as 
the hair had acted. It seemed to 
separate into an infinity of particles, 
each of which had the hairs’ hideous 
investigative propensity and the re- 
volting sucking mouth. Instead of 
the “Ah-h-h,” Jack Smith expelled a 
shout of disgust and rage. He flung 
off his coat, he ripped out his shirt 
sleeve, he grabbed a great handful 
of leaves and scrubbed at his skin 
until at last he felt clean again. 
Not until he had done all this did he 
pay the slightest attention to Old 
Satan. 

Then he saw that Old Satan was 
clear down, prostrate. He was lying 
on his back. The blood, spurting 
from his neck, had made a puddle 
all around his head and shoulders. 
Against the pale green. Jack Smith 
could plainly see the hairy, horrible 
and sinewy formation of his late 
enemy. He could also see the handle 
of his little knife, still stuck in Sat- 
an’s neck. He stood still and sighed. 

Then Old Satan spoke. In a tired, 
bored, very faraway voice, he said, 
“You cannot kill me. Jack Smith, 
for you are just a man. I am Evil-in- 
the-World, and no man can destroy 
me. I have played out this nonsense 
of a fight with you to teach you 
that. I have let you use all your 
tricks, and have let you seem to win. 
So that you would learn that you 
cannot win. A blade in my throat.?” 
Old Satan languidly lifted his tail 
toward his head and let a loop slide 


122 

over the handle o£ Jack Smith’s 
weapon. The tail then plucked the 
knife from the wound, carried it to 
Old Satan’s left chest and drove the 
steel in there. After which the tail 
seemed to collapse. It simply flopped 
back on the ground. Old Satan went 
on, exhaustedly talking. 

“In my throat, in my heart, in me 
anywhere, a human weapon is im- 
potent. Jack Smith, I tell you again; 
a man cannot fight the Devil. But 
once in a while, once in a great, 
great while, far too infrequently for 
my needs and purposes, there is a 
man who can be a devil. A man 
who can rise so high. You are such 
a one. You can be one of my helpers 
and friends. With me, you can throw 
confusion into human hypocrisy. 
You already hate it. You have al- 
ready cut yourself off from it. Now, 
with me, you can confound it. Come 
on.” 

Jack Smith thought how those 
words fit into every story he had 
ever been told about Old Satan. Old 
Satan tempted people. He made them 
great promises and then dragged 
them off to Hell. Anybody knew 
that. But why, Jack Smith asked 
himself, did Satan, trying now to 
win a recruit, put on so poor a 
showing? Why lie there, weltering 
in his blood, talking in a beyond- 
the-grave voice, while telling Jack 
Smith what a great future he could 
offer him? If, as he said, he really 
was unscathed? Why? Jack Smith 
squinted hard at the flat, sunken 
form before him. The green blood 


FANTASY AND SCIENCE FICTION 

Still flowed — what a lot the creature 
had. Were the jets slowing a little 
now? Jack Smith tried to believe 
they were. And Old Satan, making it 
clear that he read Jack Smith’s mind, 
thought for thought, gave a demon- 
stration. 

Out of his chest there rose an- 
other Old Satan, just like himself, 
except that he was uninjured and 
full of vigor. And behind this second 
Satan came a third, and a fourth and 
fifth, and so on, until a throng of 
them filled the clear space full. Ev- 
erywhere Jack Smith looked he saw 
horned heads, high shoulders, long 
bodies, pointed ears. None of these 
new Devils did anything. They just 
stood. For perhaps a minute they 
stood, while the green blood spurted 
from the DeviLon the ground. After 
which, as they had arrived, so they 
departed. One at a time they sank 
down into the first. 

“I am Evil-in-the-World, and no 
man can destroy me. Jack Smith,” 
said Old Satan again. “Come on.” 

Jack Smith knew then exactly 
what he had to do — and he did it. 
He spun on his heel and walked 
straight away from the thing before 
him, walked straight indeed, walked 
hard and fast, for he was filled 
with consummate purpose. Right in 
his path stood an oak, the biggest 
oak in Bascom’s Woods, one that 
was named the Five Hundred Year 
Tree, because people said it must be 
so old. Jack Smith did not swerve 
as he approached it. He did not 
slow down, either. He walked plumb 


■WHEN JACK SMITH FOUGHT OLD SATAN 


123 


into the monster trunk and shoved 
his breastbone against it and spread- 
eagled his arms, which, at their full 
extent, did not cover a fifth of the 
tree’s circumference. 

And so standing. Jack Smith bel- 
lowed out, in a voice that rang 
through Bascom’s Woods from one 
end to the other, the very prayer of 
all human prayers, the basic, desper- 
ate petition that lies in every simple 
heart when it has seen the determin- 
ation and elaborateness of evil. "O 
God’’ he roared, “HELP me!’’ And 
then he planted his feet with all his 
might, did as much as he could 
with his arms to grasp that great 
wall of bark, and heaved. The tree 
came up. 

Jack Smith felt its profound center 
root move first. That gave, then 
rocked and swayed. The vast root 
mat that was above it then relin- 
quished the unstirring mold in 
which it had lain for half a mil- 
lennium, and finally out sprang the 
long root arms that stretched along 
the surface, waving and flying like 
pennons of victory. And to the 
sound of a thunder too vast to be 
imagined, Jack Smith found himself 
standing with the Five Hundred 
Year Tree resting on his shoulder. 

It was an awkward thing to hold, 
and he had to act fast to keep it in 
balance. He did. He passed the trunk 
rapidly along from hand to hand 
until he grasped it about thirty feet 
short of the top. Then he swung 
the whole tree back, over his shoul- 
der, as if he were using an ax, and 


then forward, and then down. With 
all the fire in his heart he made his 
aim, and with the same fire he ex- 
pressed it. “Get!” he screamed. He 
hit. The awful weight of the central 
mat came down exactly where he 
sent it — smack — on the bleeding 
spider. And then Jack Smith was 
there alone, the tree trunk in his 
hands, himself the center of a cata- 
clysmic commotion. 

Nothing visible was moving, but 
through the length and breadth of 
Bascom’s Woods, and of the whole 
township and county, and probably 
of all Delaware, if it comes to that, 
the sound waves were leaping and 
pitching and soaring like the surface 
of the sea at the height of a hurri- 
cane. The crash of the oak had 
been simply indescribable. It was so 
big that Jack Smith could not hear 
it; he became aware of it only when, 
finally, it ended and there was quiet 
once more. And then, so stunned, so 
numbed was he, he might not have 
apprehended silence itself, except 
that this silence had a very peculiar 
little noise moving through it. It 
was like the singing of a bullet, be- 
ginning loudish but rapidly rushing 
away, yet, from both its direction 
and a certain thickness in its tone, 
making plain that the object produc- 
ing it was traveling not through 
air but earth, straight down. And 
Jack Smith understood what the ob- 
ject was. It was Old Satan, heading 
home — Old Satan diving for Hell so 
fast he made the rocks hum with 
his passage. Fainter and fainter grew 


124 

die note,- dwindled to a last, slim, 
V-shaped g-l-o-o-c-k, and stopped. 
After that, into Bascom’s Woods the 
real quiet came. 

Jack Smith let the trunk slide out 
of his hands. It sank gently to the 
ground. He followed its motion. His 
knees began to bend and went on 
bending until they brought the full 
length of his shins to the earth. He 
did not stop at that. He kept on 
sinking until he was sitting on his 
heels. All the time his eyes stayed 
fixed on the vast hole made by the 
uprooting. 

At last Jack Smith spoke. “You 
did,” he said. 

More quiet followed, a period of 
the kind that can never be measured 
on a clock. Then, sensibly, pleasantly 
and cheerily, the little chapel bell be- 
gan to ring. Jack Smith knew no 
human hands were pulling on the 
rope. He looked toward the sky 
and, very, very humbly, he touched 
his forelock. And the sun came up. 

Oma and Jack Smith were mar- 
ried soon after that night. Theirs was 
the first wedding in the chapel. The 
good people of the township (for of 


FANTASY AND SCIENCE FICTION 

course there were good people there, 
as Jack Smith himself could see 
when he looked at what was before 
his eyes instead of what was stored 
in his mind) made up a purse for 
them, in gratitude. He at first re- 
fused the gift, as contrary to his in- 
dependence. But Oma, the bride, 
plucked his sleeve and whispered, 
and he accepted. They used the 
money to buy freedom for the bound 
girl who had sampled her mistress’ 
sugar. 

Jack Smith and Oma had a long 
happy life together. For seven years, 
to be sure, they were separated; that 
was when he went to fight in Gen- 
eral Washington’s War, the conflict 
that ensued when Delaware decided 
to expel the British Empire — and 
did. Despite the interruption, how- 
ever, the pair contrived to have a 
good many children. You will find 
Smiths all over the United States 
today, fine citizens too— but, if de- 
scended from farmer-soldier Jack 
and bound girl Oma, making noth- 
ing of it. For those Smiths are from 
Delaware and Delawareans are, as I 
said at the beginning of this story, 
exclusive people. 


You are probably reading this just after the Memorial Day weekend. 
And ids only about a month till the Fourth of July, And underneath 
all of your pleasure in these national celebrations, there may be a 
certain haunting doubt, a question that keeps nagging at you . . , , 


The Holiday cM.an 

by RICHARD MATHESON 


“You’ll be late,” she said. 

He leaned back tiredly in hb 
chair. 

“I know,” he answered. 

They were in the kitchen having 
breakfast. David hadn’t eaten much. 
Mostly, he’d drunk black coffee and 
stared at the tablecloth. There were 
thin lines running through it that 
looked like intersecting highways. 

“Well?” she said. 

He shivered and took his eyes 
from the tablecloth. 

“Yes,” he said. “All right ” 

He kept sitting there. 

‘‘David," she said. 

“I know, I know,” he said. “I’ll be 
late.” He wasn’t angry. There was 
no anger left in him. 

“You certainly will,” she said, but- 
tering her toast. She spread on thick 
raspberry jam, then bit off a piece 
and chewed it cracklingly. 

David got up and walked across 
the kitchen. At the door he stopped 
and turned. He stared at the back of 
her head. 


“Why couldn’t I?” he asked again. 

“Because you can’t,” she said. 
“That’s all.” 

“But why?" 

“Because they need you,” she said. 
“Because they pay you well and you 
couldn’t do anything else. Isn’t it ob- 
vious?” 

“They could find someone else.” 

“Oh, stop it,” she said. “You know 
they couldn’t.” 

He closed his hands into fists. 
“Why should I be the one?” he 
asked. 

She didn’t answer. She sat eating 
her toast. 

“Jean?” 

“There’s nothing more to say,” she 
said, chewing. She turned around. 
“Now, will you go?” she said. “You 
shouldn’t be late today.” 

David felt a chill in his flesh. 

“No,” he said, “not today.” 

He walked out of the kitchen and 
went upstairs. There, he brushed his 
teeth, polished his shoes and put on 
a tie. Before eight he was down 


125 


126 


FANTASY AND SCIENCE FICTION 


again. He went into the kitchen. 

“Goodby,” he said. 

She tilted up her cheek for him 
and he kissed it. “’By, dear,” she 
said. “Have a — ” She stopped 
abruptly. 

“ — nice day?” he finished for her. 
“Thank you.” He turned away. “I’ll 
have a lovely day.” 

Long ago he had stopped driving 
a car. Mornings he walked to the 
railroad station. He didn’t even like 
to ride with someone else or take a 
bus. 

At the station he stood outside on 
the platform waiting for the train. 
He had no newspaper. He never 
bought them anymore. 

“Mornin’, Garrett.” 

He turned and saw Henry Coul- 
ter who also worked in the city. 
Coulter patted him on the back. 

“Good morning,” David said. 

“How’s it goin’?” Coulter asked. 

“Fine. Thank you.” 

“Good. Lookin’ forward to the 
Fourth?” 

David swallowed. “Well . . .” he 
began. 

“Myself, I’m takin’ the fainily to 
the woods,” said Coulter. “No lousy 
fireworks for us. Pilin’ into the old 
bus and headin’ out till the fireworks 
are over.” 

“Driving,” said David. 

“Yes, sir,” said Coulter. “Far as wc 
can.” 

It began by itself. No, he thought; 
not now. He forced it back into its 
darkness. 


“ — rising business,” Coulter fin- 
ished. 

“What?” he asked. 

“Said I trust things are goin’ well 
in the advertising business.” 

David cleared his throat. 

“Oh, yes,” he said. “Fine.” He al- 
ways forgot about the lie he’d told 
Coulter. 

When the train arrived he sat in 
the No Smoking car knowing that 
Coulter always smoked a cigar en 
route. He didn’t want to sit with 
Coulter. Not now. 

All the way to the city he sat look- 
ing out the window. Mostly he 
watched road and highway traffic; 
but once, while the train rattled over 
a bridge, he stared down at the mir- 
ror-like surface of a lake. Once he 
put his head back and looked up at 
the sun. 

He was actually to the elevator 
when he stopped. 

“Up?” said the man in the maroon 
uniform. He looked at David stead- 
ily. “Up?” he said. Then he closed 
the rolling doors. 

David stood motionless. People be- 
gan to cluster around him. In a mo- 
ment, he turned and shouldered by 
them, pushing through the revolv- 
ing door. As he came out, the oven 
heat of July surrounded him. He 
moved along the sidewalk like a 
man asleep. On the next block he 
entered a bar. 

Inside, it was cold and dim. There 
were no customers. Not even the 
bartender was visible. David sank 


THE HOLIDAY MAN 


127 


down in the shadow of a booth and 
took his hat off. He leaned his head 
back and closed his eyes. 

He couldn’t do it. He simply 
could not go up to his office. No 
matter what Jean said, no matter 
what anyone said. He clasped his 
hands on the table edge and 
squeezed them until the fingers were 
pressed dry of blood. He just 
wouldn’t. 

“Help you.^’’ asked a voice. 

David opened his eyes. The bar- 
tender was standing by the booth 
looking down at him. 

“Yes, uh . . . beer,” he said. He 
hated beer but he knew he had to 
buy something for the privilege of 
sitting in the chilly silence undis- 
turbed. He wouldn’t drink it. 

The bartender brought the beer 
and David paid for it. Then, when 
the bartender had gone, he began to 
turn the glass slowly on the table 
top. While he was doing this it be- 
gan again. With a gasp, he pushed 
it away. No ! — he told it; savagely. 

In a while he got up and left the 
bar. It was past ten. That didn’t 
matter, of course. They knew he was 
always late. They knew he always 
tried to break away from it and 
never could. 

His office was at the back of the 
suite, a small soundproof cubicle fur- 
nished only with a rug, a couch and 
a small desk on which lay pencils 
and white paper. It was all he need- 
ed. Once he’d had a secretary but he 
hadn’t liked the idea of her sitting 


outside the door and listening to 
him scream. 

No one saw him enter. He let 
himself in from the hall through a 
private door. Inside, he relocked the 
door, then took off his suit coat and 
laid it across the desk. It was stuffy 
in the office so he walked across the 
floor and pulled up the window. 

Far below, the city moved. He 
stood watching it. How many of 
them.? he thought. 

Sighing heavily, he turned. Well, 
he was here. There was no point in 
hesitating any longer. He was com- 
mitted now. The best thing was to 
get it over and clear out. 

He drew the blinds, walked over 
to the couch and lay down. He fussed 
a little with the pillow, then 
stretched once and was still. Almost 
immediately, he felt his limbs going 
numb. 

It began. 

He did not stop it now. It trick- 
led on his brain like melted ice. It 
rushed like winter wind. It spun 
like blizzard vapor. It leaped and 
ran and billowed and exploded and 
his mind was filled with it. He grew 
rigid and began to gasp, his chest 
twitching with breath, the beating 
of his heart a violent stagger. His 
hands drew in like white talons, 
clutching and scratching at the 
couch. He shivered and groaned 
and writhed. Finally, he screamed. 
He screamed for a very long while. 

When it was done, he lay limp 
and motionless on the couch, his 
eyes like balls of frozen glass. When 


128 

he could, he raised his arm and 
looked at his wrist watch. It was 
almost two. 

He struggled to his feet. His 
bones felt sheathed with lead but he 
managed to stumble to his desk. 

There he wrote on a sheet of pa- 
per and, when he was finished, 
slumped across the desk and fell in- 
to exhausted sleep. 

Later, he woke up and took the 
sheet of paper to his superior who, 
looking it over, nodded. 

“Four hundred eighty-six, huh?” 
the superior said. “You’re sure of 
that?” 

“I’m sure,” said David, quietly. “I 
watched every one.” He didn’t men- 
tion that Coulter and his family 
were among them. 

“All right,” said his superior, 
“Let’s see now. Four hundred fifty- 
two from traffic accidents, eighteen 

from drowning, seven from sun- 

/ 

★ 


BINDERS . . . 

The Magazine of FANTASY 
and SCIENCE FICTION has 

in stock a supply of strong, 
handsome binders for your 
copies of F&SF. Each binder 
holds one complete volume — 
six issues. The price is $ 1 .50 
postpaid. Send your order 
remittance to: Special Binder 
Dept., F&SF, 527 Madison 
Ave., N. Y. 22, N. Y. 


FANTASY AND SCIENCE FICTION 

stroke, three from fireworks, six 
from miscellaneous causes.” 

Such as a litde girl being burned 
to death, David thought. Such as a 
baby boy eating ant poison. Such 
as a woman being electrocuted; a 
man dying of snake bite. 

“Well,” his superior said, “let’s 
make it — oh, four hundred and fifty. 
It’s always impressive when more 
people die than we predict.” 

“Of course,” David said. 

The item was on the front page of 
all the newspapers that afternoon. 
While David was riding home the 
man in front of him turned to his 
neighbor and said, “What I’d like 
to know is — how can they tell?" 

David got up and went back on 
the platform at the end of the car. 
Until he got off, he stood there lis- 
tening to the train wheels and think- 
ing about Labor Day. 


★ 



Wherever you go, F&SF will follow — 
if you send ns your new address as 
early as possible (5 or 6 weeks are 
needed.) Please be sure to give us your 
old address as well as the new one. 

SUBSCRIPTION SERVICE, F&SF 
527 MADISON AVE., N.Y.C. 22, N.Y. 


^nc^S^o^ub’s An^ng 
®*jvioon-Tooi[ Offer. . 


continued from Back Cover 

N OW you can get an authen- 
tic Round-Trip Reservation 
to the Moon Free when you take 
the Lunar Quiz on other side — 
Plus any 3 of the masterpieces 
of Science-Fiction described on 
this page for only $1. Each is 
packed with rocket-swift ad- 


venture that takes you soaring 
in time and space . . . written by 
the greatest science-fiction 
writers. A $11.95 value, full- 
length, full-size, in handsome, 
permanent bindings — and all 
yours for only $1 on this amaz- 
ing offer ! 


“"‘'eetrouf 

Ftee 


Omnibus «f 
SCIENCE 
fiction 


SCIENCE-FICTION 

BEST SELLERS 

WORTH UP TO $11.95 IN PUBLISHERS' EDITIONS 



TREASURY OF SCIENCE-FICTION 
CLASSICS. 4 famous novels ; a complete 
play : scores of all-time great S-F 
stories, including H. G. Wells’ "Inva- 
sion from Mars," made famous by Orson 
Welles' hoax newscast. (Pub. ed. $2.95) 

OMNIBUS OF SCIENCE-FIC- 
TION. 43 classic stories by top au- 
thors. Wonders of Earth and Man. 
Amazing Inventions. Space travel 
and visitors from outer space. Ad- 
ventures in dimension. Worlds of 
Tomorrow. (Pub. ed. $3.50) 

THE ASTOUNDING SCIENCE- 
FICTION ANTHOLOGY. A story 


about the first A-Bomb . . . written 
before it was invented 1 Plus a score 
of other best tales from a dozen 
years of Astounding Science Fic- 
tion Magazine. (Pub. ed- $3.50) 

REPORT ON UNIDENTIFIED 
FLYING OBJECTS by Edward J. 
Ruppelt. The first authoritative 
report on hitherto hushed-up facts 
about "flying saucers” ... by a for- 
mer Air Force expert in charge of 
their investigation. NOT fiction, but 
amazing FAC'T! (Pub. ed. $4.95) 

DRAGON IN THE SEA by Frank 
Herbert. You're on a 21st-century 
undersea mission from which no 
human has ever returned. Now 8,- 
000 feet down, you learn that an un- 
known crewman wants you DEAD ! 
(Pub. ed. $2.95) 

THE BEST FROM FANTASY 
AND SCIENCE-FICTION. (New 

edition) 17 thrilling stories select- 
ed from Fantasy and Science-Fic- 
tion Magazine. Adventure in other 
worlds . . . mystery, intrigue, sus- 
pense! (Pub. ed. $3.50) 


SEND NO MONEY- Jusf Mail Coupon 


Y our choice of ANY 3 of the new 
Science- Fiction masterpieces describ- 
ed here — At Only $1 for All Three — 
Plus Free Round-Trip Reservation to 
the Moon. (See other side.) Two books 
are your gift for joining, and one is 
your first Club selection. Every month, 
you will be offered the “cream” of the 
new $2.50 to $3.95 Science-Fiction books 
— for only $1. You take only those books 
you really want — as few as four a year. 
This offer may have to be withdrawn. So 
mail coupon Right Now to ; 

SCIENCE-FICTION BOOK CLUB 
Dept. MFSF-7 Garden City, N. Y. 


SCIENCE-FICTION BOOK CLUB 
Dept. MFSF-7 Garden City, N. Y. 

I have completed quiz on other side. Please send FREE Moon- 
Tour Reservation. Also rush 3 books checked below, as my gift books 
and first selection. Bill me only $1 (plus shipping charge), and 
enroll me as a member. Every month send the Club’s free bulletin, 
so that I may decide whether I wish to receive the coming selection. 
For each book I accept, I will pay only $1 plus shipping. I need take 
only 4 books during each year I am a member — and I may resign at 
any time after accepting 4 selections. 

GUARANTEE: If not delighted, I may return all books In 7 days, 
pay nothing, and this membership will be cancelled, 


n Astounding S-F Anthology 

□ Best from Fantasy and S-F 

□ Dragon in the Sea 


I Name— 


□ Omnibus of Science-Fiction 

□ Report on UFO's 

n Treasury of S-F Classics 

- (PLEASE PRINT) 


Address- 
City_ 


. Zon^~ 


. State— 


SAME OFFER TO RESIDENTS OF CANADA; Ad- 
dress Science-Fiction Book Club, Bond St., 

Toronto 2. Offer good in U.S.A. Canada only. 





OF THESE COMPLETE NEW MASTERPIECES OF 


‘VT'ES, a passing grade on this Lunar Quiz "will 
bring you — Absolutely Free — a genuine 
round-trip Reservation which certifies that you 
are among the Very First to apply for passage 
to the Moon ! Although it in no way commits you 
to make the voyage, it signifies that your name 
is filed in Science-Fiction Book Club archives to 
be turned over to the first commercial company 
making trips to the Moon. 

Your reservation includes many amazing 
facts : your actual weight on the Moon, a Rocket 
Ship Schedule, etc. To get your wallet-size Moon 
Tour Reservation right away, take the Quiz 
below. Then choose Any 3 of the exciting books 
described on the other side — for only $1 with 
membership in the Science-Fiction Book Club. 
Mail coupon at once ! 


SCIENCE-FICTION 


CAN PASS THIS LUNAR QUIZ? 

How much do you know about the Moon? Circle the answers 
you think are correct, fill out reverse side, and mail today 
for your Genuine Moon-Tour Reservation Certificate. 


?! 


WITH 


1. Diameter of the Moon Is: smaller — greater — the same as 
Karlh's. 


2. Since Its gravity Is weaker than Earth's, on the Moon you 
would weigh : more — less than on Earth. 


3. The Moon is really a; star — satellite — planet. 

4. Distance to the Moon is about: 93.000.000 miles — 238,000 
miles — 9.000 miles. 


5. Scientists have proved that human life does — does not exist 
on the Moon. 


4. Surface of the Moon Is rough — smooth — covered with water. 


IMPORTANT: This application will NOT be honored 
unless filled out and signed on the reverse side. 


SEE OTHER SIDE OF COUPON FOR UP TO $11.95 WORTH 
OF SCIENCE-FICTION BEST SELLERS FOR ONLY $1.00! 


This authentic certificate is a 
Bonafide Reservation for one of 
the first commercial flights to the Moon 


Take This Lunar Quiz 

and WIN A ROUND-TRIP 
RESERVATION TO THE MOON